Owner's Manual for Contents Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine
THE BMW 4 SERIES COUPE. OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
4 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 © 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VI/13, 07 13 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 178 Refueling page 226. 180 Fuel 181 Wheels and tires 190 Engine compartment 6 Notes 192 Engine oil At a glance 195 Coolant 12 Cockpit 196 Maintenance 16 iDrive 198 Replacing components 24 Voice activation system 210 Breakdown assistance 27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 216 Care
Controls Reference 32 Opening and closing 222 Technical data 47 Adjusting 226 Everything from A to Z 57 Transporting children safely 61 Driving 73 Displays 89 Lamps 94 Safety 115 Driving stability control systems 120 Driving comfort 142 Climate control 149 Interior equipment 157 Storage compartments
Driving tips 164 Things to remember when driving 167 Loading 170 Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 6
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system. The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Refers to measures that can be taken to ular topic is by using the index. help protect the environment. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele‐ Updates made after the editorial vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐ deadline mation on a particular part or assembly. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ pendix of the printed quick reference for the Vehicle equipment vehicle. This Owner's Manual describes all models and User's manual for Navigation, all standard, country-specific and optional Entertainment, Communication equipment that is offered in the model series. The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment munication and the short commands of the is also described and illustrated that is not voice activation system are described in a sep‐ available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the arate user's manual, which is also included selected optional equipment or the country- with the onboard literature. specific variants. This also applies for safety-related functions Additional sources of information and systems. Should you have any questions, your service For options and equipment not described in center will be glad to advise you at any time. this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐ Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is plementary Owner's Manuals. available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐ trations. Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed Status of the Owner's precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐ Manual hicle. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ policy of constant development that is con‐ tion. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ lect individual functions. scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐ those in your vehicle. tivation system.
6 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 7
Notes
Updates made after the editorial alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, deadline wheels, suspension components, brake dust Any updates made after the editorial deadline shields, telephones, including operation of any for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ mobile phone from within the vehicle without pendix of the printed quick reference for the using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐ vehicle. ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐ For your own safety promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the Maintenance and repairs BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information. Maintenance, re‐ Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern placement, or repair of the emission control materials and high-performance electronics, devices and systems may be performed by any requires suitable maintenance and repair automotive repair establishment or individual methods. using any certified automotive part. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ California Proposition 65 Warning ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ California laws require us to state the following ately trained personnel. warning: If this work is not carried out properly, there is Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ the danger of subsequent damage and related bile components and parts, including compo‐ safety hazards. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Parts and Accessories State of California to cause cancer and birth For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain chase accessories tested and approved by products of component wear contain or emit BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ chemicals known to the State of California to ously acquire the assurance that they have cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ timum performance when installed on your ve‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used from defects in material and workmanship. engine oil contains chemicals that have caused BMW will not accept any liability for damage cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect resulting from installation of parts and acces‐ your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot water. test every product made by other manufactur‐ ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely Service and warranty and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera‐ We recommend that you read this publication tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ BMW Accessories and other products ap‐ lowing warranties: proved by BMW, together with professional ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. non-BMW approved accessories such as
7 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 8
Notes
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Data memory ranty. Many electronic components on your vehicle ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ ited Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events Detailed information about these warranties is and faults. This technical information generally listed in the Service and Warranty Information documents the state of a component, a mod‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and ule, a system or the environment: Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Operating states of system components, Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and fill levels for instance. designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from ditions and homologation requirements in your its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ country and continental region in order to de‐ tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle transverse acceleration. is operated under those conditions. If you wish ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ to operate your vehicle in another country or tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ conditions and homologation requirements. tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐ You should also be aware of any applicable gagement of stability control systems. warranty limitations or exclusions for such ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. country or region. In such case, please contact This data is purely technical in nature and is Customer Relations for further information. used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over Maintenance routes traveled cannot be created from this Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ road safety, operational reliability and the New pair services, service processes, warranty Vehicle Limited Warranty. claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ mation can be read out from the event and ures: fault memories by the service personnel, in‐ cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system nostic tools. You can obtain further information ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, for US models the information in the fault memory is deleted ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for or overwritten on a continuous basis. Canadian models When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ If the vehicle is not maintained according to ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ciate this technical data with individuals if it is ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐ not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐ Warranty. ness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
8 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 9
Notes
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle Reporting safety defects data to be transmitted from the vehicle. For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned Event Data Recorder EDR and operated in the US. This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐ The EDR is designed to record data related to wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a 1-800-831-1117. short period of time, typically 30 seconds or If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may less. open an investigation, and if it finds that a The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it such data as: may order a recall and remedy campaign. ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were However, NHTSA cannot become involved in operating. individual problems between you, your dealer, ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger or BMW of North America, LLC. safety belts were fastened. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 the accelerator and/or brake pedal. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ These data can help provide a better under‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ standing of the circumstances in which formation about motor vehicle safety from crashes and injuries occur. http://www.safercar.gov EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are For Canadian customers recorded by the EDR under normal driving Canadian customers who wish to report a conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can ment, could combine the EDR data with the also obtain other information about motor vehi‐ type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
9 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblinds 44 5 Lamps 2 Power windows 43 Front fog lamps 92 3 Exterior mirror operation 54 4 Glove compartment on the driver's Parking lamps 89 side 157 Driver assistance systems Low beams 89 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 111
Intelligent Safety 102
Lane departure warning 109
12 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
Automatic headlamp con‐ Increase distance 122 trol 90 Daytime running lights 90 Cruise control rocker switch 127, 121 Adaptive Light Control 90 8 Instrument cluster 73 High-beam Assistant 91 9 Steering wheel buttons, right Instrument lighting 92 Entertainment source
6 Steering column stalk, left Volume Turn signal 66
Voice activation 24 High beams, head‐ lamp flasher 66 Telephone, see user's manual for High-beam Assistant 91 Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Roadside parking lamps 90 Thumbwheel for selection lists 84 10 Steering column stalk, right Computer 84 Windshield wipers 66
Rain sensor 67 7 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed 126 Clean the windshields and head‐ lamps 68 Resume speed 128 11 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 62 Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing 127 Auto Start/Stop function 63 Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐ terrupting 120 12 Horn Reduce distance 122 13 Steering wheel heating 56
14 Adjust steering wheel 56 15 Unlock hood 191
13 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Headliner 15 9 Parking brake 65 2 Control Display 16 10 PDC Park Distance Control 128 3 Ventilation 147 Rearview camera 131 4 Hazard warning system 210 Parking assistant 137 Surround View 131 Central locking system 35 11 Driving Dynamics Control 117
5 Glove compartment 157 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 115 6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ 12 Automatic transmission selector nication lever 69 7 Climate control 142 Manual transmission selector lever 69 8 Controller with buttons 16
14 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
All around the headliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 92 quest 210
2 Glass sunroof, powered 45 5 Interior lamps 92
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag 96
15 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 16
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Control Display All standard, country-specific and optional Hints equipment that is offered in the model series is ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ care instructions. ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control equipment or country variant. This also applies Display; otherwise, the Control Display can for safety-related functions and systems. be damaged.
Switching off The concept 1. Press the button. The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐ 2. "Switch off control display" tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location. Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at‐ tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen Controls back on.
Controller with navigation system Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn.
1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad The buttons can be used to open the me‐ nus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.
16 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 17
iDrive At a glance
2. Press. 1. Turn.
3. Move in four directions. 2. Press.
3. Move in two directions. Buttons on controller
Press the but‐ Function ton
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu. Buttons on controller TEL Opens the Telephone menu. Press the but‐ Function BACK Displays the previous panel. ton OPTION Opens the Options menu. MENU Open the main menu.
Controller without navigation system Audio Open audio menu last lis‐ tened to, switch between au‐ Select menu items and create settings. dio menus.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
17 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
Press the but‐ Function Menu items in the Owner's Manual ton In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., BACK Open previous panel. "Settings". OPTION Opens the Options menu. Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a Operating concept new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Opening the main menu The current panel is closed and the previ‐ Press the button. ous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed. ▷ Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ ous display.
The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected. White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice.
Opening the Options menu 2. Press the controller. Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
The function is deactivated.
Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
Additional options: move the controller to the 1. "Settings" right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is 2. "Touchpad" displayed. 3. Select the desired function. ▷ "Speller": letters and numbers, enter‐ Options menu ing. The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ "Map": operating the interactive map. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. This area remains unchanged. ▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters ▷ Control options for the selected main and numbers are announced. menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, further operating options for Entering letters and numbers the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". The entry of the letters requires some practice at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to Changing settings the following: 1. Select a field. ▷ For the entry of large/small letters and 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting numbers, first convert via iDrive to the cor‐ is displayed. responding Input mode, refer to page 22. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad.
Operating the interactive map 3. Press the controller. The interactive map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. The function is activated.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
Function Controls 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller. Interactive map. Slide in the correspond‐ ing direction.
Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag the display inwards teractive map. or outwards with the fin‐ gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Changing settings Settings on the control display, such as the 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do lighted, and then press the controller. this slide to the left or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and lighted, and then press the controller. press the controller. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.
Status information
Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left ▷ Time. to display "Time/Date". ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output, on/off. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. ▷ Telephone status. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
Radio symbols Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are switched off. Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning Split screen Incoming or outgoing call. General information Missed call. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information Wireless network reception from the computer. strength. In the divided screen view, the so-called split Symbol flashes: network search. screen, this information remains visible even Wireless network is not available. when you change to another menu.
Bluetooth is switched on. Switching the split screen on and off Roaming is active. 1. Press the button. Text message was received. 2. "Split screen" Check the SIM card. Selecting the display SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing. 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" Enter the PIN. 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. Entertainment symbols 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content". Symbol Meaning 5. Select the desired menu item. CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface/mobile phone audio interface.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
21 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
Programmable memory buttons
General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. ▷ To display short information: touch the The settings are stored for the remote control button. currently in use. ▷ To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period. Without navigation system and telephone Deleting the button assignments Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐ 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐ approx. five seconds. tertainment, Communication. 2. "OK" Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. Entering letters and numbers 2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ Running a function bers. Press the button. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed. The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed 3. "OK": confirm the entry. when a phone number is selected. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers: Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear Symbol Function gloves or use objects. Press the controller: delete the let‐ The key assignment is displayed at the top ter or number. edge of the screen. Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:
22 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system Select the symbol.
Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 24
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment Using voice activation All standard, country-specific and optional Activating the voice activation system equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ 1. Press the button on the steering ment is also described that is not available in a wheel. vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies 2. Wait for the signal. for safety-related functions and systems. 3. Say the command. The command is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ ▷ Most functions that are displayed on the cates that the voice activation system is active. Control Display can be operated by spoken If no other commands are available, operate commands via the voice activation system. the function in this case via iDrive. The system prompts you to make your en‐ tries. Terminating the voice activation ▷ Functions that can only be used when the system vehicle is stationary cannot be operated Briefly press the button on the steer‐ using the voice activation system. ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Possible commands Manual to use with the voice activation system. Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on which Requirements menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system Short commands exist for many functions. so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can fied. also be selected via the voice activation sys‐ Set the language, refer to page 87. tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud You can have the available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐ played, the commands for the settings are read out loud.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 25
Voice activation system At a glance
Executing functions using short Via short command commands Playback of the CD can also be started via a Functions on the main menu can be performed short command. directly by means of short commands, nearly 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output irrespective of which menu item is currently if necessary. selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation 2. Press the button on the steering system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ wheel. munication Owner's Manual. 3. ›C D drive track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. Help dialog for the voice activation system Setting the voice dialog Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ Additional commands for the help dialog: You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. ▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the current operating options and the most im‐ In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the portant commands for them are an‐ announcements from the system are issued in nounced. an abbreviated form. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information On the Control Display: about the principle of operation for the 1. "Settings" voice activation system is announced. 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" Example: playing back a CD 4. Select the setting.
Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›Multimedia‹ The medium last played is played back. Adjusting the volume 4. ›C D‹ Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ 5. ›C D drive‹ struction until the desired volume is set. 6. ›Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use.
25 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 210, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 27
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment Select components
All standard, country-specific and optional 1. Press the button. equipment that is offered in the model series is 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a 3. Press the controller. vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional 4. Selecting desired range: equipment or country variant. This also applies ▷ "Quick reference" for safety-related functions and systems. ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Owner's Manual" Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐ bed therein.
Components of the integrated Owner's Manual The integrated Owner's Manual consists of Leafing through the Owner's Manual three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ mation or access possibilities. Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous Quick Reference Guide page is displayed. Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the Page by page without link access operation of basic vehicle functions or for what Leaf through the pages directly while skipping to do in the event of a flat tire. This information the links. can also be displayed during driving. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press Search by pictures the controller to leaf from page to page. Information and descriptions based on illustra‐ Leaf back. tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is Leaf forward. needed.
Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.
27 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 28
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened di‐ General information rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Opening via the iDrive rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press the button or move the control‐ ler to the right repeatedly until the 2. Press the desired button for more "Options" menu is displayed. than 2 seconds. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Executing Opening when a Check Control Press the button. message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ Directly from the Check Control message on mediately. the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐ ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
28 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 29
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
29 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment Integrated key All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key Press the button on the back of the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. Buttons on the remote control The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐ tains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 39.
Replacing the battery 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid 4 Panic mode in alarm system
General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote battery. control. The settings called up and implemented when 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. the car is unlocked depend on which remote 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐ ment; see arrow 2. file, refer to page 33. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the Information on the required maintenance is positive side facing upwards. stored in the remote control as well. Service 5. Press the cover closed. data in the remote control, refer to page 196
32 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
Take the used battery to a recycling Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while center or to your service center. pressing the brake. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check New remote controls Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on You can obtain new remote controls from your the steering column and press the Start/Stop service center. button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch pedal. Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center. Personal Profile Emergency detection of remote control The concept It is possible to switch on the ignition or start You can set several of your vehicle's functions the engine in situations such as the following: to suit your personal needs and preferences. ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the mote control by external sources. profile currently activated. ▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. ▷ The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐ ▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐ file is called up. bile devices in close proximity to the re‐ mote control. ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has ▷ Interference of radio transmission by been used in the meantime by someone charger while charging items such as mo‐ else with another remote control. bile devices in the vehicle. The individual settings are stored for three A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ Personal Profiles and one guest profile. tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine. Transmitting the settings Starting the engine with emergency Your personal settings can be taken with you detection of the remote control to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. For more information, contact your service center. The settings are transmitted as follows: ▷ Via the USB interface for data transfer. ▷ BMW Online.
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the
33 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
Profile management Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the Opening the profiles saved contacts can be exported. A different profile can be called up than the This can be helpful for securing and retrieving one associated with the remote control cur‐ personal settings, before delivering the vehicle rently in use. to a workshop for example. 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 2. "Profiles" 3. Select a profile. 3. "Export profile" Called up profile is assigned to the remote 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" control being used at the time. USB interface: "USB device" Renaming profiles Using the guest profile 1. "Settings" The guest profile can be used to make individ‐ 2. "Profiles" ual settings without affecting the three Per‐ The current profile is selected. sonal Profiles. 3. Open "Options". This can be useful for drivers who are using 4. "Rename current profile" the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile. Resetting profiles 1. "Settings" The settings of the active profile are reset to 2. "Profiles" their default values. The current profile is selected. 1. "Settings" 3. Open "Guest". 2. "Profiles" 4. Create the settings. The current profile is selected. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile" Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each Importing profiles start for selecting the desired profile. Existing settings and contacts are overwritten 1. "Settings" with the imported profile. 2. "Profiles" 1. "Settings" 3. Open "Options". 2. "Profiles" 4. "Display user list at startup" 3. "Import profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Personal Profile settings USB interface: "USB device" The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. ▷ Collision warning: warning time. ▷ Exterior mirror position.
34 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to The system simultaneously engages and re‐ last. leases the locks on the following: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. ▷ Doors. ▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program ▷ Trunk lid. ▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐ ▷ Fuel filler flap. trieved after unlocking. ▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐ Operating from the outside ment. ▷ Via the remote control. ▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, ▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and position and rotation of the display. front passenger doors. ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐ The following takes place simultaneously ting. when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐ ▷ Tone: tone settings. mote control: ▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐ ▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, mate control with enhanced features: set‐ the theft protection is activated/deacti‐ tings. vated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock but‐ ▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice tons or the door opener. output on/off. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and ▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the courtesy lamps are switched on and off. signal tone volume. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 42, is ▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to armed or disarmed. last, special settings. ▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions Operating from the inside and type of display. ▷ Side View: selection of the display type. ▷ Language on the Control Display. ▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/ off. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/off. ▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation. Via the button for the central locking system. ▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the after starting to drive. fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the Central locking system central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps The concept come on. The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed.
35 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing: from Switching on interior lamps and the outside courtesy lamps Press the button on the remote control Using the remote control with the vehicle locked.
General information Panic mode Take the remote control with you You can trigger the alarm system if you find People or animals left unattended in a yourself in a dangerous situation. parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ Press the button on the remote con‐ side. Always take the remote control with you trol for at least 3 seconds. when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀ To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlocking Opening the trunk lid Press the button on the remote con‐ Press the button on the remote con‐ trol. trol for approx. 1 second.
The vehicle is unlocked. The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy was previously locked or unlocked. lamps are switched on. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available Create the settings, refer to page 41. before opening. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk Convenient opening lid can only be opened using the remote con‐ The remote control can be used to simultane‐ trol if the vehicle has been unlocked. ously open the windows and the glass sunroof. Do not place the remote control in the Press and hold the button on the re‐ cargo area mote control. Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ The windows and the glass sunroof open. mote control is locked inside the vehicle when Releasing the button stops the motion. the trunk lid is closed.◀ The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is Locking pushed closed. Press the button on the remote control. Malfunction Locking from the outside If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐ locked with the remote control, the battery Do not lock the vehicle from the outside may be discharged or there may be interfer‐ if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot ence from external sources such as mobile be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, edge.◀ transmission towers, etc.
36 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at Locking from the outside the door lock using the integrated key. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot For US owners only be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ The transmitter and receiver units comply with edge.◀ part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication The alarm system is triggered when the door is Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door erned by the following: lock. FCC ID: In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle ▷ LX8766S. with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ ▷ LX8766E. tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of ▷ LX8CAS. the remote control. ▷ LX8CAS2. Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via the door lock. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: Locking the doors and trunk lid This device complies with part 15 of the FCC together Rules. Operation is subject to the following To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once: two conditions: 1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐ ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ing the button for the central locking sys‐ ference, and tem in the interior. ▷ this device must accept any interference 2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐ received, including interference that may senger door. cause undesired operation. 3. Lock the vehicle. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to ▷ Lock the driver's door using the operate this equipment. integrated key in the door lock, or ▷ Press down the lock button of the front Using the door lock passenger door and close the door from the outside. General information The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.
Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐ lock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver's door.
37 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing: from Opening from the outside the inside
Locking and unlocking
▷ Press the button on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the ▷ With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens doors and the trunk lid when the front doors with no-touch activation, refer to are closed, but they are not secured against page 40. theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Opening from the inside Push the button in the driver's foot‐ Unlocking and opening well. ▷ Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if then pull the door handle above the arm‐ it is not locked. rest or Closing ▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
Trunk lid
Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid. Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀
38 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
Do not place the remote control in the Comfort Access cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not The concept leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when ing the remote control. the trunk lid is closed.◀ All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. Locking separately The vehicle automatically detects the remote The trunk lid can be locked separately with the control when it is nearby or in the passenger switch in the front passenger glove compart‐ compartment. ment. Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. ▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ row 2. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation. Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from ▷ Start the engine. the central locking system. Functional requirements If the glove compartment on the front passen‐ ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ opened. ence nearby. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ must be located outside of the vehicle. trol can be handed out without the key. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Emergency unlocking ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Access.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks.
39 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
Unlocking Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately This corresponds to pressing the but‐ ton on the remote control. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front Take the remote control with you and do not passenger door completely, arrow 1. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when This corresponds to pressing the button the trunk lid is closed.◀ on the remote control.
Opening trunk lid with no-touch Locking activation With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be opened with no-touch activation using the re‐ mote control you are carrying. A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens.
Foot movement to be carried out Do not touch vehicle Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. With the foot motion, make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; This corresponds to pressing the button otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from on the remote control. hot exhaust system parts.◀ To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ 1. Position in the center behind the vehicle. sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐ 2. Move foot in the direction of travel under‐ hicle. neath the bumper and immediately back.
Convenient closing Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
Opening ▷ "Driver's door only" The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it Only the driver's door and the fuel filler was previously locked or unlocked. flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and locks the entire vehicle. up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available ▷ "All doors" before opening. The entire vehicle is unlocked. Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or tem flashes. the country-specific variant, you can set Preventing inadvertent opening whether the doors are also unlocked with the button on the remote control. In situations where the trunk lid should is not to be opened with no-touch activation, en‐ Confirmation signals from the vehicle sure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m 1. "Settings" from the rear of the car. 2. "Doors/key" Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ vertently, for example by an unintentional or mation signals. misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it Automatic locking experiences interference from external sour‐ The setting is stored for the remote control ces such as mobile phones, metal objects, currently in use. overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. 1. "Settings" In this case, open or close the vehicle using the 2. "Doors/key" buttons on the remote control or use the 3. Select the desired function: integrated key in the door lock. ▷ "Lock if no door opened" If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with The vehicle locks automatically after a the remote control button or with the button on short period of time if a door is not the trunk lid. opened. ▷ "Lock after start driving" Adjusting The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away. Unlocking The setting is stored for the remote control Retrieving the seat and mirror settings currently in use. The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ 1. "Settings" rently in use. 2. "Doors/key" When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions 3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:" are automatically retrieved if this function was 4. Select the desired function: activated.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat Door lock and armed alarm system If this function is used, first make sure The alarm system is triggered when the door is that the footwell behind the driver's seat is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐ lock. jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀ In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle The adjustment procedure is interrupted: with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. the remote control. ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ ory is pressed. Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the Activating the setting alarm system is armed. 1. "Settings" Press the button on the remote con‐ 2. "Doors/key" trol for approx. 1 second. 3. "Last seat position autom." With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with no-touch activation, refer to page 40. Alarm system After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The The concept hazard warning system flashes once. The vehicle alarm system responds to: In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk ▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con‐ lid. trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.
▷ Movements in the vehicle. Panic mode ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the yourself in a dangerous situation. car. Press the button on the remote con‐ ▷ Interruptions in battery voltage. trol for at least 3 seconds. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. To switch off the alarm: press any button. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ Switching off the alarm tem. ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐ ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. trol. Arming and disarming the alarm ▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying system the remote control with you, pull on the driver side or front passenger side door General information handle. When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ cess at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview Avoiding unintentional alarms mirror The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every interior motion sensor 2 seconds: The system is armed. Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: is locked. The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ onds and then continues to flash. cured. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ again. sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing: Power windows The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking General information until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: Take the remote control with you An alarm has been triggered. Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐ Tilt alarm sensor jure themselves.◀ The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.
Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.
43 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
Opening wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. No window accessories The window opens while the switch is held. Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows; otherwise, ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ ance point. The window opens automatically. Closing without the pinch protection system Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Keep the closing path clear Convenient opening, refer to page 36, via the remote control. Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is Closing clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Keep the closing path clear For example, if there is an external danger or if Monitor the closing process and make ice on the windows prevents a window from sure that the closing path of the window is closing normally, proceed as follows: clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance The pinch protection is limited and the point. window reopens slightly if the closing force The window closes while the switch is exceeds a certain value. held. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance there. point. The window closes without pinch protec‐ The window closes automatically. tion. Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Comfort Access. Roller sunblinds
Pinch protection system Roller sunblind for rear window If the closing force exceeds a specific value as General information a window closes, the closing action is inter‐ rupted. If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ blind for the rear window after having activated The window reopens slightly. it a number of times in a row, the system is Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐ tection ing. Let the system cool. Even with the pinch protection system, check The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ be moved at low interior temperatures.
44 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
Extending or retracting roller blind for Opening/closing the glass sunroof and rear window sliding visor together Press the button. ▷ Slide switch back to the re‐ sistance point and hold. Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor open together as long as Glass sunroof, powered the switch is held down. ▷ Press switch back past the resistance General information point. The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ The glass sunroof and sliding visor open tion is switched on. automatically. Pressing the switch again Keep the closing path clear stops the opening motion. Monitor the closing process and make Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof sliding the switch forward. is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ The sliding visor remains open and can be Take the remote control with you closed by hand. Take the remote control with you when Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ remote control. ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐ Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with selves.◀ Comfort Access.
Comfort position Stops the roof in the comfort position if the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passenger compartment. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the switch.
Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ Tilting the glass sunroof roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ Push switch upward briefly. ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from ▷ Closed roof is tilted open. the tilted position during closing. ▷ The opened roof closes until The glass sunroof opens again slightly. it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays com‐ Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ pletely open. tection Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in
45 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
certain extreme situations, such as when thin pleted when the sunroof is objects are present.◀ completely closed. ▷ The roof closes without pinch protection. Closing from the open position without pinch protection For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ ceed as follows: 1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold. Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐ opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection.
Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection. Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is com‐ plete: ▷ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com‐
46 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 47
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Manually adjustable seats All standard, country-specific and optional At a glance equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital 1 Forward/backward contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. 2 Thigh support The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: 3 Seat tilt ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 51. 4 Backrest width ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 52. 5 Lumbar support ▷ Airbags, refer to page 94. 6 Height 7 Backrest tilt
Seats Forward/backward
General information Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired Also on the front passenger side, do not incline direction. the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ slipping under the safety belt in the event of an ward or back slightly to make sure it engages accident. This would eliminate the protection properly. normally provided by the belt.◀
47 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 48
Controls Adjusting
Height Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary. 1 Seat and mirror memory Backrest tilt 2 Backrest width 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Note The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the Pull the lever and apply your weight to the function, refer to page 41, is activated for this backrest or lift it off, as necessary. purpose.
Seat tilt Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back.
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat engages properly.
48 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.
Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. 4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.
Backrest width Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support.
Entering the rear
Note Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving away, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.◀
49 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
Manual length adjustment ▷ Press and hold the button until the seat has moved to the de‐ Comfort entry sired position. Releasing the button The comfort entry contains a memory function stops the motion. for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ▷ Press the button briefly. The seat ment. automatically moves to the end position. Pressing again stops the mo‐ 1. Pull lever up to the stop. tion.
Original position 1. Moving the seat to its original position: ▷ Press and hold the button until the seat has moved to its original position. Releasing the button stops the motion. ▷ Press the button briefly. The seat moves to its original position. 2. Fold backrest forward. Pressing again stops the motion. 3. Push the seat forward. 2. Folding the backrest back.
Original position Front seat heating After getting into the rear, slide the seat back‐ wards and fold the backrest back.
Electric forward/backward adjustment
Comfort entry The comfort entry contains a memory function for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐ ment. 1. Pull lever up to the stop. Switching on Press the button once for each tem‐ perature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐ cally with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 171, is acti‐ 2. Fold backrest forward. vated, the heater output is reduced. 3. To change the entry area:
50 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
Switching off Reduction of restraining effect Press the button longer. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder The LEDs go out. belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.◀ Safety belts Buckling the belt Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with four safety belts for the safety of you and your passen‐ gers. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in Hints the belt buckle. Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Unbuckling the belt Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for 1. Hold the belt firmly. safety belts. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. One person per safety belt 3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Never allow more than one person to Safety belt reminder for driver's and wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or passenger's seat small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ The indicator lamp flashes or lights up Putting on the belt and a signal sounds. Make sure that Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly the safety belts are positioned cor‐ across the lap and shoulders, as close to the rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can low around the hips in the lap area and does also be activated if objects are placed on the not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt front passenger seat. can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. Damage to safety belts The safety belt must not lie across the neck, In the case of strain caused by accidents or rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or damage: breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.
51 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
Checking and replacing safety belts Pinch protection system Have the work performed only by your Free range of movement of the belt car‐ service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured rier that this safety feature will function properly.◀ Even with pinch protection, make sure that the range of motion of the belt carrier remains free. Belt carrier Otherwise, an interruption is not guaranteed under certain circumstances.◀ The concept If the belt carrier encounters resistance when The belt carrier makes it easier to put on the extending or retracting, the belt carrier moves safety belt. back somewhat in the respective opposite di‐ rection and stops in this position. General information To reactivate the belt carrier, open and close the door or turn the ignition off and on.
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. After the door is closed and the vehicle key has been detected in the passenger compartment, Adjusting the head restraint the belt carrier extends automatically and Correctly adjust the head restraints of all keeps the safety belt ready to put on, arrow. occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐ After the belt is put on, it goes back into the creased risk of injury in an accident.◀ idle position.
If the safety belt has not yet been applied, the Height belt carrier goes back under the following cir‐ Adjust the head restraint so that its center is cumstances: approximately at ear level. ▷ Waiting time approx. five minutes. Distance ▷ Opening the respective door. Adjust the distance so that the head restraint ▷ After a short trip. is as close as possible to the back of the head. ▷ Locking the vehicle. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting If the respective door is closed, the belt carrier the tilt of the backrest. is re-activated when the vehicle key has been detected in the interior.
52 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting the height
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible. ▷ To raise: pull. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and head restraint out completely. push the head restraint down. Before transporting passengers Tilt Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ Three different tilt positions are available. tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀
Seat and mirror memory
General information
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ straint forward, arrow 1. ▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head restraint folds as far back as possible.
Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror sitting in the seat in question. positions can be stored and retrieved for each remote control. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
Mirrors 3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up. Exterior mirrors 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out. At a glance If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐ 1 Adjusting dent.◀ 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. General information 2. Switch off the ignition. The mirror on the passenger side is more 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. curved than the driver's side mirror. The corresponding seat position is performed Estimating distances correctly automatically. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ than they appear. Do not estimate the distance ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk Safety mode of an accident.◀ 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the nition. mirror setting is stored for the remote control 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ until the adjustment procedure is com‐ mote control, the position is automatically re‐ pleted. trieved if the setting for this function is active.
Calling up of a seat position Selecting a mirror deactivated To change over to the other mirror: After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery Slide the mirror changeover switch. power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Adjusting electrically ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid. The setting corresponds to the direc‐ ▷ Press a button on the remote control. tion in which the button is pressed. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
54 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
Saving positions Automatic heating Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 53 Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running. Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, Automatic dimming feature press the edges of the mirror glass. Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐ Automatic Curb Monitor terior rear view mirror, refer to page 55. When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐ Interior rearview mirror senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐ Reducing the blinding effect ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position. 2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐ Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by senger's side mirror position. the interior mirror.
Fold in and out Interior rearview mirror, automatic Press the button. dimming feature
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. The concept For example, this is advantageous ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Photocells are used for control: Before washing the car in an automatic ▷ In the mirror glass. car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or ▷ On the back of the mirror. with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.◀
55 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
Functional requirement Switching on/off For proper operation: Press the button. ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside ▷ On: the LED lights up. rearview mirror and the windshield. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Steering wheel
General information Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
56 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 57
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐ ger side airbags, refer to page 96. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is Note described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a Deactivated front passenger airbags vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional If a child restraint fixing system is used in equipment or country variant. This also applies the front passenger seat, the front passenger for safety-related functions and systems. airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ The right place for children straint fixing system.◀
Note Children in the vehicle Installing child restraint Do not leave children unattended in the fixing systems vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the Before mounting doors.◀ Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked. Children should always be in the rear Hints Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint fixing systems Transporting children in the rear To select, mount and use child restraint fixing Only transport children younger than systems, observe the information provided by 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐ the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐ tective effect can be impaired.◀ vided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐ Lock the rear seat backrests in position creased risk of injury in an accident. Before installing a child restraint system, Children 13 years of age or older must wear a make sure that the rear seat backrests are safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not fixing system can no longer be used, due to guaranteed and there is an increased risk of in‐ their age, weight and size.◀ jury for the child in the event of an accident.◀
Children on the front passenger seat On the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint fixing system in the front passenger Deactivating airbags seat, make sure that the front, knee and side After installing a child restraint fixing system in airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐ the front passenger seat, make sure that the
57 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 58
Controls Transporting children safely
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐ Child seat security senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐ matically, refer to page 96. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ straint fixing system.◀ The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems. Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as Locking the safety belt possible and adjust its height to the highest 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. position to obtain the best possible position for 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system the belt and to offer optimal protection in the with the belt. event of an accident. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and Do not change the seat position and height af‐ pull it taut against the child restraint fixing ter this. system. The safety belt is locked.
Backrest width Unlocking the safety belt Adjustable backrest width: before installing a 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐ 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. senger seat, open the backrest width com‐ pletely. Do not change the backrest width 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐ again and do not call up a memory position. pletely. Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing LATCH child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, the back‐ system rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐ the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ dren.
Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac‐ turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
58 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 59
Transporting children safely Controls
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors With a through-loading system: The lower anchors may be used to attach the Position CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restr- ained by the internal harnesses. Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.◀ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ cated behind the indicated covers. Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system. Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems Without a through-loading system: 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐ Position fer to the user's manual of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap
Note Mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐ cated in the gap between the seat and back‐ ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes rest. could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.◀
59 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 60
Controls Transporting children safely
1 Direction of travel 2 Upper retaining strap 3 Head restraint. 4 Rear window shelf 5 Mounting point/eye 6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Remove the mounting point cover. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
60 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 61
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be All standard, country-specific and optional started. equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Note ment is also described that is not available in a If the engine is switched off and the ignition is vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional switched on, the system automatically equipment or country variant. This also applies switches to the radio ready state when the for safety-related functions and systems. door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.
Start/Stop button Ignition off The concept Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button again, but do not depress the brake. Pressing the Start/Stop button Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ switches the ignition on or off Stop button again, and do not press on the and starts the engine. clutch pedal at the same time. Automatic transmission: The All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go engine starts if the brake is de‐ out. pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button. To save battery power when the engine is off, Manual transmission: the engine starts if the switch off the ignition and any unnecessary clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop electronic systems/power consumers. button is pressed. Transmission position P with the ignition off Ignition on When the ignition is switched off, position P is Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop engaged automatically. When in an automatic button but do not depress the brake. car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ is not switched off accidentally.◀ Stop button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: All vehicle systems are ready for operation. ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the low beams are activated. instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be To save battery power when the engine is off, started. This function is only available switch off the ignition and any unnecessary when the low beams are switched off. electronic systems/power consumers. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if The ignition switches off automatically: the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the ▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low low beams are switched off. beams are switched on.
61 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 62
Controls Driving
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if Repeated starting in quick succession the driver's door is open and the low Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to beams are switched off. start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several When the ignition is switched off, by opening times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐ active. lytic converter.◀ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while Radio ready state the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at Activate radio ready state: moderate engine speeds. ▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. Starting the engine The radio ready state switches off automati‐ 1. Depress the brake pedal. cally: 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐ ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. tral. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ 3. Press the Start/Stop button. tral locking system. The ignition is activated automatically for a ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ completely, so that the engine can still be gine starts. started. Automatic transmission
Starting the engine Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. Hints 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Enclosed areas The ignition is activated automatically for a Do not let the engine run in enclosed certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes gine starts. may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic Engine stop gas.◀ Hints Unattended vehicle Take the remote control with you Do not leave the vehicle unattended with Take the remote control with you when the engine running; doing so poses a risk of leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ danger. ple, cannot start the engine.◀ Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ mission in position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.◀
62 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 63
Driving Controls
Set the parking brake and further secure Certain vehicle components may experience the vehicle as required additional wear as a result of this system. Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward Automatic mode and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐ hicle, for example, by turning the steering ter each engine start. wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ This function is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a Engine stop car wash, heed the information regarding The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ Washing in automatic car washes, refer to ing a stop under the following conditions: page 216. Manual transmission: ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is Manual transmission not pressed. Switching off the engine ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button. Automatic transmission: 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ tion D. 3. Set the parking brake. ▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the Automatic transmission vehicle is stopped. ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐ Switching off the engine er's door is closed. 1. Engage transmission position P with the The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced vehicle stopped. when the engine is switched off. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Displays in the instrument cluster The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on. The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto 3. Set the parking brake. Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically. Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been satis‐ The concept fied. The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic Note lights. The ignition remains switched on. The The engine is not switched off automatically in engine starts again automatically for driving the following situations: off.
63 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 64
Controls Driving
▷ External temperature too low. The engine can only be started via the Start/ ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Stop button. matic climate control is running. Note ▷ The passenger compartment has not yet been heated or cooled to the required Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐ level. activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ ature. ▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐ partment when the cooling function is ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the switched on. steering wheel is being turned. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S. matic climate control is switched on. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. position is changed from P to N, D, R or ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. M/S. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐ matic climate control is switched on. tion N or M/S. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. ▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐ partment when the heating is switched on. Starting the engine ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐ The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐ lowing conditions: pressed a number of times in succession. ▷ Manual transmission: The clutch pedal is pressed. Activating/deactivating the system manually ▷ Automatic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal. Using the button After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lamps light up for varying Press the button. lengths of time.
64 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 65
Driving Controls
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is The indicator lamp lights up red. The deactivated. parking brake is set. The engine is started during an automatic Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian engine stop. models The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button. Releasing ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide is deactivated. the lever down. Transmission position P is engaged auto‐ matically. Hints 2. Set the parking brake. Use while driving Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. If on a rare occasion it is necessary to use the parking brake while driving, do not use Automatic deactivation excessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed. In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ sons, such as when the driver is detected to be ing the parking brake may cause the rear absent. wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀ To prevent corrosion and braking control on Malfunction one side only, lightly apply the parking brake The Auto Start/Stop function no longer periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions switches of the engine automatically. A Check permit. Control message is displayed. It is possible to The brake lamps will not light up if the parking continue driving. Have the system checked. brake is engaged.
Parking brake
Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.
65 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 66
Controls Driving
Turn signal, high beams, High beams, headlamp flasher headlamp flasher
Turn signal Do not fold in the exterior mirrors Do not fold in the exterior mirror while driving and when the turn signals/warning flashers are working, or else the additional flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐ ger be in the prescribed position and will be difficult to see.◀ ▷ High beams, arrow 1. ▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2. Using turn signals
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor Press the lever beyond the resistance point. may be damaged.◀ To switch off manually, press the lever to the No wiper operation on dry windshield resistance point. Do not use the windshield wipers if the Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp windshield is dry, as this may damage the indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ Triple turn signal activation No wiper operation with wipers folded Press the lever to the resistance point. away The turn signal flashes three times. Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded The function can be activated or deactivated: away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be 1. "Settings" damaged.◀ 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 67
Driving Controls
Switching on Intermittent operation or rain sensor
The concept Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror. Press the wiper levers up. Activating/deactivating The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary. Press the button on the wiper lever. Switching off and brief wipe The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐ ing operation is started. At temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.◀
Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
67 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 68
Controls Driving
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Fold-out position of the wipers the rain sensor Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐ shield. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. Turn the thumbwheel. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. Clean the windshield, headlamps Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation. Pull the wiper lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. Washer fluid
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐ General information lar intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on. Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause Do not use the washer system at freezing injury if it is used incorrectly. temperatures Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐ Do not use the washers if there is any danger tion. that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐ erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this Only keep it in the closed original container reason, use antifreeze. and inaccessible to children. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ empty; otherwise, you could damage the tainer. pump.◀ United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual Windshield washer nozzles states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
68 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 69
Driving Controls
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ Manual transmission centrate or the equivalent.◀ Shifting Washer fluid reservoir Shifting into 5th or 6th gear Adding washer fluid When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push Only add washer fluid when the engine is the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐ cool, and then close the cover completely to vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could avoid contact between the washer fluid and lead to engine damage.◀ hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk Reverse gear to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance needs to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ ervoir. Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ ward gears are available. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ centrate and tap water and – if required – with a R is Reverse washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ turer's recommendations. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain N is Neutral the correct mixing ratio. Use in automatic car washes, for example. The Do not add windshield washer concentrate and vehicle can roll. antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 61, position P is engaged automatically. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can P Park result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. For the capacity, refer to technical data. P is engaged automatically: ▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to page 62, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 61, and when position R or D is engaged.
69 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 70
Controls Driving
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐ After releasing the selector lever, it returns to gaged. its center position. ▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐ tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐ gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Kickdown Press unlock button, in order to: Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond ▷ Engage R. the resistance point at the full throttle position. ▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging the transmission position Engaging P ▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐ gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed. ▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock. Depress the brake until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after Press button P. you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are Sport program and manual mode ready to start.◀ Activating the sport program Engaging D, R and N
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ mission position D. rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 71
Driving Controls
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster. vated. Shift paddles Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Push the selector lever to the left out of transmission position D. 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S you to shift gears quickly while keeping both manual mode is automatically upshifted as hands on the steering wheel. needed. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the Switching to manual mode transmission temporarily switches to manual ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ mode. ward. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐ wards. tem switches back into automatic mode if the Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine selector lever is in transmission position D. and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle. sible if the engine speed is too high. ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine strument cluster, followed by the current gear. and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ sible if the engine speed is too high. Sport automatic transmission: prevent The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ automatic upshifting in M/S manual strument cluster, followed by the current gear. mode For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐ sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐ Displays in the instrument cluster formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐ The transmission position is dis‐ ple, if one of the following conditions is met: played, e.g.: P. ▷ DSC deactivated. ▷ TRACTION activated. ▷ SPORT+ activated. Sport automatic transmission: launch In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. Control
Ending the sport program/manual The concept mode Launch Control enables optimum acceleration Push the selector lever to the right. on surfaces with good traction.
71 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 72
Controls Driving
Hints Component wear Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀ Did not use Launch Control during the break- in, refer to page 164, period. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km. To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.
Start with launch control While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select with the Driving Dynamics Control Sport+. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. 2. Engaging the transmission position S 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 4. Press on the accelerator beyond the resist‐ ance point at the full throttle position. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 73
Displays Controls
Displays
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 78 5 Engine oil temperature 78 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 80 3 Indicator/warning lamps 76 7 Electronic displays 75 4 Tachometer 78 8 Display/reset miles 79
73 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 74
Controls Displays
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Fuel gauge 78 5 Engine oil temperature 78 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 80 3 Indicator/warning lamps 76 7 Electronic displays 75 4 Tachometer 78 8 Display/reset miles 79
74 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 75
Displays Controls
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 76 Miles/trip miles 79 Time 79 Computer 84 Date 79 2 Transmission display 71 External temperature 79 Gear shift indicator 81 Selection lists 84 3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control 117 Service requirements 80
75 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 76
Controls Displays
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Time 79 Navigation display, see user's manual for External temperature 79 Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. Date 79 2 Energy recovery 80 Selection list, e.g., radio 84 Transmission display 71 Speed limit detection 82 Current fuel consumption 80 Computer 84 ECO PRO 171 Miles/trip miles 79 3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 76 Service requirements 80
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control The concept Display. The Check Control system monitors functions Indicator/warning lamps in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ A Check Control message is displayed as a nations and colors. combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in Several of the lamps are checked for proper the Head-up Display. functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
76 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 77
Displays Controls
Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system
Symbol Function or system Safety belts.
Turn signal. Airbag system.
Front fog lamps. Steering system.
Rear fog lamp. Engine functions.
High beams. Parking brake. Brake system. High-beam Assistant. In Canadian models Parking brake. Parking lamps, headlamp control. Brake system.
ABS Antilock Brake System. Active Cruise Control.
ABS Antilock Brake System in Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Canadian models. Control: collision warning. At least one Check Control mes‐ Speed limit, adjustable. sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐ bol in display).
Cruise control. Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol Lane departure warning. in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps. DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of DSC Dynamic Stability Control is a fault or the required action, can be called up deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐ via Check Control. tion Control is activated. The supplementary text of urgent messages is Tire Pressure Monitor. automatically displayed on the Control Display. Flat Tire Monitor.
77 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 78
Controls Displays
Symbols 3. "Check Control" Depending on the Check Control message, the 4. Select the text message. following functions can be selected. ▷ "Owner's Manual" Messages after trip completion Display additional information about the Special messages that are displayed during Check Control message in the Integrated driving are displayed again after the ignition is Owner's Manual. switched off. ▷ "Service request" Contact the service partner. Fuel gauge ▷ "Roadside Assistance" The vehicle inclination may Contact Roadside Assistance. cause the display to vary.
Hiding Check Control messages US models: the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 178.
Tachometer Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ Press the computer button on the turn signal rupted to protect the engine. lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared Engine oil temperature until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ the low temperature end. sages are displayed consecutively. Drive at moderate engine These messages can be hidden for approx. and vehicle speeds. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ played again automatically. ture: the pointer is in the ▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden middle or in the left half of automatically after approx. 20 seconds. the temperature display. They are stored and can be displayed ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐ again later. perature end. A Check Control message is also displayed. Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"
78 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 79
Displays Controls
Coolant temperature Time If the coolant along with the engine becomes The time is displayed at the bot‐ too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. tom of the instrument cluster. Check the coolant level, refer to page 195. Setting the time and time for‐ mat, refer to page 86. Odometer and trip odometer Date ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. The date is displayed in the computer. Setting the date and date for‐ mat, refer to page 87.
Display/reset miles Press the knob. Range ▷ When the ignition is After the reserve range is switched off, the time, the reached: external temperature and ▷ A Check Control message is the odometer are displayed. displayed briefly. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip ▷ The remaining range is odometer is reset. shown on the onboard com‐ puter. ▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such External temperature as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured. External temperature warning The Check Control message appears continu‐ If the indicator drops to ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. Refuel promptly A Check Control message is Refuel no later than at a range of displayed. 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is There is the increased danger of ice. not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Ice on roads Displaying the cruising range Even at temperatures above 1. "Settings" +37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on 2. "Info display" roads. 3. "Additional indicators" Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐ shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐ ter. creased risk of an accident.◀
79 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 80
Controls Displays
Current fuel consumption The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service Instrument cluster specialist.
Displays the current fuel con‐ Display sumption. You can check Data regarding the service status or legally whether you are currently driv‐ mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ ing in an efficient and environ‐ matically transmitted to your service center mentally-friendly manner. before a service due date.
Instrument cluster with enhanced Instrument cluster features Display in the instrument clus‐ Displays the current fuel con‐ ter. sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv‐ ing in an efficient and environ‐ mentally-friendly manner. Instrument cluster with enhanced Displaying the current fuel features consumption Display in the instrument cluster 1. "Settings" with expanded scope. 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re‐ Energy recovery quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy 1. "Vehicle Info" while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ 2. "Vehicle status" tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. 3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. Service requirements 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. The concept The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly af‐ ter the ignition is switched on.
80 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 81
Displays Controls
Symbols Service history Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐ Symbols Description ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data. No service is currently re‐ The entries are like a service booklet of the quired. documentation of regular maintenance. The entered maintenance work can be dis‐ The deadline for service or a played on the Control Display. Function is legally mandated inspection is available as soon as a maintenance operation approaching. has been entered in the vehicle data.
The service deadline has al‐ 1. "Vehicle Info" ready passed. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" Entering appointment dates 4. "Service history" Enter the dates for the required inspections. Performed maintenance operations are displayed. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly. 5. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" Symbols 3. "Service required" Symbols Description 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" Green: maintenance was per‐ formed on schedule. 6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm. Yellow: maintenance was per‐ The entered date is stored. formed late.
Automatic Service Request Maintenance was not per‐ Data regarding the service status or legally formed. mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date. Gear shift indicator You can check when your service center was notified. The concept 1. "Vehicle Info" The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ 2. "Vehicle status" cient gear in the current driving situation. 3. Open "Options". Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and 4. "Last Service Request" the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission and in the manual transmission.
81 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 82
Controls Displays
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also the instrument cluster. detected and compared with vehicle interior On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐ engaged gear is displayed. played depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in Manual transmission: displays the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. Symbol Description No Passing Information Fuel efficient gear is engaged. No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐ ter displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The Shift up to fuel efficient gear. system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs. No display is shown: Shift down to fuel efficient gear. ▷ In countries where No Passing zones are primarily identified with road markings. Shift into neutral. ▷ On routes without signage. ▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐ way markings or other situations where no signage is present, but passing would not Automatic transmission: displays be permitted. Example Description Hints Fuel efficient gear is engaged. Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute Shift into fuel efficient gear. for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀ Speed limit detection with No Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
82 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 83
Displays Controls
At a glance Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Camera No Passing Information ▷ Start of No Passing zone. ▷ End of No Passing zone. ▷ No Passing Information not available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
The camera is located near the base of the System limits mirror. The system may not be fully functional and Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. Switching on/off ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. 1. "Settings" ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in 2. "Info display" front of you. 3. "Speed limit information" ▷ When driving toward bright lights. If speed limit detection is switched on, it can ▷ When the windshield behind the interior be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ment cluster via the onboard computer. No ered by a sticker, etc. Passing Information is displayed together with ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the the activated speed limit information. camera. ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation Display system are incorrect. The following is displayed in the instrument ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ cluster. tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, Speed limit detection such as due to changes in the road net‐ Current speed limit. work. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ Speed limit detection is not ately after vehicle shipment. available.
83 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 84
Controls Displays
Selection lists in the Activating a list and creating the instrument cluster setting
The concept The following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instru‐ ment cluster: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding Control are displayed. list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ Display ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐ wheel. Instrument cluster
Computer
Indication in the info display The information from the on‐ board computer is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features Calling up information on the info display
Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 85
Displays Controls
Information at a glance If there is only enough fuel left for less than Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display signal lever calls up the following information changes. on the info display: Average fuel consumption ▷ Range. The average fuel consumption is calculated for ▷ Average fuel consumption. the period during which the engine is running. ▷ Current fuel consumption. The average fuel consumption is calculated for ▷ Average speed. the distance traveled since the last reset by the ▷ Date. onboard computer. ▷ Speed limit detection. Average speed ▷ Time of arrival. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the When destination guidance is activated in engine manually stopped do not enter into the the navigation system. calculation of the average speed. ▷ Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in Resetting average values the navigation system. Press and hold the computer button on the ▷ Arrow view of navigation system. turn signal lever. When destination guidance is activated in Distance to destination the navigation system. The distance remaining to the destination is When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐ displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ play is inactive. gation system before the trip is started. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ tomatically. Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the on‐ Time of arrival board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en‐ 1. "Settings" tered in the navigation system 2. "Info display" before the trip is started. 3. Select the desired displays. The time must be correctly set.
Information in detail Speed limit detection Range Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 82, function. Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. Speed limit It is calculated based on your driving style over Display of a speed limit which, when reached, the last 20 miles/30 km. should cause a warning to be issued.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 86
Controls Displays
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed "Automatically reset": all values are reset drops below the set speed limit once by at approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to least 3 mph/5 km/h. a standstill.
Displaying, setting or changing the Display on the Control Display limit Display the onboard computer or trip computer 1. "Settings" on the Control Display. 2. "Speed" 1. "Vehicle Info" 3. "Warning at:" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed. Resetting the fuel consumption or 5. Press the controller. speed The speed limit is stored. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" Activating/deactivating the limit 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 1. "Settings" 4. "Yes" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller. Sport displays In the Control Display, the current values for Setting your current speed as the limit power and torque can be displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" Displaying sport displays in the Control Display 3. "Select current speed" 1. "Vehicle Info" 4. Press the controller. 2. "Sport displays" The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit. Settings on the Control Trip computer Display The vehicle features two types of computer. ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as Time often as necessary. ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an Setting the time zone overview of the current trip. 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" Resetting the trip computer 3. "Time zone" 1. "Vehicle Info" 4. Select the desired time zone. 2. "Trip computer" The time zone is stored. 3. "Reset": all values are reset.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 87
Displays Controls
Setting the time Language 1. "Settings" Setting the language 2. "Time/Date" To set the language on the Control Display: 3. "Time:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours 1. "Settings" are displayed. 2. "Language/Units" 5. Press the controller. 3. "Language:" 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ 4. Select the desired language. nutes are displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control 7. Press the controller. currently in use. The time is stored. Setting the voice dialog Setting the time format Voice dialog for the voice activation system, 1. "Settings" refer to page 25. 2. "Time/Date" Units of measure 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. Setting the units of measure The time format is stored. To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature: Date 1. "Settings" Setting the date 2. "Language/Units" 1. "Settings" 3. Select the desired menu item. 2. "Time/Date" 4. Select the desired unit. 3. "Date:" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. Brightness 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month Setting the brightness and year. To set the brightness of the Control Display: The date is stored. 1. "Settings" Setting the date format 2. "Control display" 1. "Settings" 3. "Brightness" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 3. "Format:" 5. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired format. The setting is stored for the remote control The date format is stored. currently in use.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 88
Controls Displays
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness control may not be clearly visible.
Assist system information
Display on the Control Display Information on the Assist system can be dis‐ played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐ play. 1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Driver assistance info"
88 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 89
Lamps Controls
Lamps
Vehicle equipment If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ All standard, country-specific and optional cally switched off at these switch settings. equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Parking lamps ment is also described that is not available in a Switch position : the vehicle lamps light vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional up on all sides, e.g., for parking. equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐ charged and it would then be impossible to At a glance start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 90.
Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
1 Rear fog lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior 2 Front fog lamps lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐ 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive locked. Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐ come lamps, Daytime running lights Activating/deactivating 4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings" 5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 2. "Lighting" 6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam 3. "Welcome lights" Assistant The setting is stored for the remote control 7 Instrument lighting currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature Parking lamps/low beams, The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlamp control headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐ tion is switched off. General information Setting the duration Switch position: 0, , 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"
89 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 90
Controls Lamps
3. "Pathway lighting:" Roadside parking lamps 4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐ nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever lamps are switched on. either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot Switching off serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in ment in determining when the lamps should be the opposite direction. switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect Adaptive Light Control fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually The concept under these conditions.◀ Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ Daytime running lights tion of the road surface. With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ ning lights light up in position 0, or . rameters, the light from the headlamp follows After the ignition is switched off, the parking the course of the road. lamps light up in position . In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is Activating/deactivating switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the In some countries, daytime running lights are inside of the curve is better lighted. compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐ tivate the daytime running lights. Activating 1. "Settings" Switch position with the ignition switched on. 2. "Lighting" The turning lamps are automatically switched 3. "Daytime running lamps" on depending on the steering angle or the use The setting is stored for the remote control of turn signals. currently in use.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 91
Lamps Controls
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ The indicator lamp in the instrument tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ cluster lights up. er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp tomatically brightened or dimmed. is active. The system responds to light from oncoming Malfunction traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ failed. Have the system checked as soon as ment cluster lights up when the system possible. switches on the high beams. Depend‐ ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ High-beam Assistant ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, The concept the blue indicator light will stay on. When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐ tem automatically switches the high beams on Switching the high beams on and off and off or suppresses the light in the areas that manually blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐ fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. ▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ ton on the turn signal lever.
System limits The High-beam Assistant can be activated Personal responsibility when the low beams are switched on. The high-beam assistant cannot serve as 1. Turn the light switch to or . a substitute for the driver's personal judgment 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, of when to use the high beams. Therefore, arrow. manually switch off the high beams in situa‐ tions where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
91 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 92
Controls Lamps
The system is not fully functional in situations If the automatic headlamp control, refer to such as the following, and driver intervention page 90, is activated, the low beams will come may be necessary: on automatically when you switch on the front ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, fog lamps. such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and Instrument lighting wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. Adjusting ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ The parking lamps or low beams sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ must be switched on to adjust coming traffic on freeways. the brightness. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the Adjust the brightness using the presence of highly reflective signs. thumbwheel. ▷ At low speeds. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ Interior lamps ered with stickers, etc. General information Camera The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐ cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.
The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
1 Interior lamps Fog lamps 2 Reading lamp
Front fog lamps Switching the interior lamps on and The parking lamps or low beams must be off switched on. Press the button. Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.
92 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 93
Lamps Controls
To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. When the interior lamps are switched off per‐ manently, the reading lamps cannot be switched on.
Ambient light Depending on the equipment, the lighting can be adjusted in the interior for some lights.
Selecting color scheme 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select the desired setting. If the color scheme of the line is selected and the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome lamps are displayed in the color of the line when the vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting but also independently of it.
1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 4. Adjust the brightness.
93 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 94
Controls Safety
Safety
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag
Front airbags Head airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports passenger by responding to frontal impacts in the head. which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ quate restraint. Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal Side airbags impact. In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
94 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 95
Safety Controls
Protective action ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end This also applies to steering wheel covers, collisions. the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.◀ Information on how to ensure the optimal Even when all instructions are followed closely, protective effect of the airbags injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ In the case of a malfunction, deactivation gered. and after triggering of the airbags ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ Do not touch the individual components imme‐ jects between an airbag and a person. diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by ▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the your service center or a workshop that has the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not necessary authorization for handling explo‐ cover with adhesive labels or coverings, sives. and do not attach holders such as for navi‐ gation instruments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ undesired triggering of the airbag, either of ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and which could result in injury.◀ legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warnings and information on the airbags are ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or also found on the sun visors. other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats Functional readiness of the airbag with integrated side airbags. system ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as When the ignition is switch on, the jackets, over the backrests. warning lamp in the instrument cluster ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads lights up briefly and thereby indicates away from the side airbag and do not rest the operational readiness of the entire airbag against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries system and the belt tensioner. can occur if the airbags are triggered. ▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, cover them or modify ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. them in any way.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 96
Controls Safety
When there is a malfunction, have the ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats airbag system checked immediately or other items to the front passenger seat When there is a malfunction, have the airbag unless they are specifically recommended system checked immediately; otherwise, there by the manufacturer of your vehicle. is a risk that the system does not function as ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the expected in the event of an accident despite passenger seat if a child restraint system is corresponding severity of the accident.◀ to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that Automatic deactivation of the front could press against the seat from below. passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas‐ Indicator lamp for the front passenger senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ airbags sistance of the human body. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.◀ The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ Child restraint fixing system in the front bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger seat passenger airbags. Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐ senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ tivated or deactivated. structions under Children on the front passen‐ ▷ The indicator lamp lights up ger seat.◀ when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ Malfunction of the automatic ing system intended for that deactivation system purpose is detected on the When transporting older children and adults, seat or the seat is empty. the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐ The airbags on the front vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, passenger side are not acti‐ the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ vated. bags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, In this case, change the sitting position so that for example, a correctly seated person of the front passenger airbags are activated and sufficient size is detected on the seat. The the indicator lamp goes out. airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have tivated. the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly
96 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 97
Safety Controls
Detected child seats Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that The concept were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was The system monitors tire pressure in the four manufactured. After installing a child seat, mounted tires. The system warns you if there make sure that the indicator lamp for the front is a significant loss of pressure in one or more passenger airbags lights up. This indicates tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire that the child seat has been detected and the valves measure the tire pressure and tire tem‐ front passenger airbags are not activated. perature.
Strength of the driver's and front Hints passenger airbag Tire damage due to external factors The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on Sudden tire damage caused by external the position of the driver's and front passenger influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ seats. Pay attention to the other information and indi‐ To maintain the accuracy of this function over cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a page 181, as well when using the system. corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the Calibrating the front seats correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ A corresponding message appears on the ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐ Control Display. sured. 1. Move the respective seat forward all the Reset the system again after each correction way. of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. 2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when Status display the message on the Control Display disap‐ The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ pears. tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. peat the calibration. 1. "Vehicle Info" If the message does not disappear after a re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as 2. "Vehicle status" soon as possible. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Unobstructed area of movement The status is displayed. Ensure that the area of movement of the Status display seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀ The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display.
97 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 98
Controls Safety
All wheels green The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during cally. the last reset. Low tire pressure message One wheel is yellow The yellow warning lamp lights up. A A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in Check Control message is displayed. the indicated tire. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. All wheels are yellow ▷ No reset was performed for the system. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in The system therefore issues a warning several tires. based on the tire pressures before the last reset. Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. for this may be: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. ▷ The system is being reset. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with ▷ Malfunction. regular tires or run-flat tires. Carry out reset Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the Reset the system after each correction of the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Do not continue driving without run-flat tires 1. "Vehicle Info" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 2. "Vehicle status" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 3. "Perform reset" may result in serious accidents.◀ 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. When a low inflation pressure is indicated, 5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset". DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on 6. Drive away. if necessary. The tires are shown in gray and the status is Actions in the event of a flat tire displayed. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a Normal tires short period, the tire inflation pressures set are 1. Identify the damaged tire. accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically during driving. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is correct, it is possible that a reset was not active" is displayed. carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset.
98 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 99
Safety Controls
If an identification is not possible, please trip, the actual distance may be smaller or contact the service center. greater depending on the driving speed, road 2. Rectify the flat tire. conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐ tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐ Continued driving with a flat tire tronics. In this case, have the electronics Drive moderately and do not exceed a checked at the next opportunity and have speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. them replaced if necessary. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ Run-flat tires duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering Maximum speed properties.◀ You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving Continued driving with a flat tire can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ not continue driving, and contact your service vers. center.◀ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at Required inflation pressure check the next opportunity. message If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires A Check Control message is displayed. is correct, it is possible that a reset was not Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In a reset of the system. that case, carry out a reset. In some cases, a wheel was changed without Possible driving distance with complete loss of having carried out a reset. tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire System limits inflation pressure depends on the cargo load The system does not function properly if a re‐ and the driving style and conditions. set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is For a vehicle containing an average load, the reported even though the tire inflation pres‐ possible driving distance is approx. sures are correct. 50 miles/80 km. The tire pressure depends on the temperature When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ due to driving or because of the heat of the duced lane stability during braking, a longer Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. braking distance, and altered self-steering The tire pressure is reduced when the tire properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ temperature falls again. This behavior may ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ cause a warning to be issued if temperatures ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. fall very sharply. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the
99 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 100
Controls Safety
Malfunction proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The yellow warning lamp flashes and even if under-inflation has not reached the then lights up continuously. A Check level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low Control message is displayed. No flat tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected. been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ Display in the following situations: cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: tor is combined with the low tire pressure have the service center check it if neces‐ telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ sary. tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ your service center. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with is illuminated, the system may not be able to the same radio frequency: after leaving the detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. area of the disturbance, the system auto‐ TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of matically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement Each tire, including the spare (if provided) or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ to continue to function properly. flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the The concept proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system does not measure the actual infla‐ As an added safety feature, your vehicle has tion pressure in the tires. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ the rotational speeds of the individual wheels sure telltale when one or more of your tires is while moving. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ should stop and check your tires as soon as sponding wheel change. This is detected and possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ reported as a flat tire. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to Functional requirements tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
100 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 101
Safety Controls
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with tion of the tire inflation pressure and after regular tires or run-flat tires. every tire or wheel change. Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the Status display letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can Do not continue driving without run-flat be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., tires whether or not the FTM is active. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 1. "Vehicle Info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 2. "Vehicle status" may result in serious accidents.◀ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ The status is displayed. bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Initialization System limits The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ Sudden tire damage tion tire pressures as reference values for the Sudden serious tire damage caused by detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐ confirming the inflation pressures. vance.◀ Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire 1. "Vehicle Info" inflation pressure regularly. 2. "Vehicle status" The system could be delayed or malfunction in 3. "Perform reset" the following situations: 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. 6. Drive away. ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive The initialization is completed while driving, wheels, high lateral acceleration. which can be interrupted at any time. ▷ When driving with snow chains. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Actions in the event of a flat tire Indication of a flat tire Normal tires The yellow warning lamp lights up. A 1. Identify the damaged tire. Check Control message is displayed. Do this by checking the air pressure in all There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire four tires. inflation pressure. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ have been initialized. In this case, initialize vers. the system.
101 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 102
Controls Safety
If an identification is not possible, please Continued driving with a flat tire contact the service center. Drive moderately and do not exceed a 2. Rectify the flat tire. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a Run-flat tires change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer Maximum speed braking distance and altered self-steering You can continue driving with a damaged tire properties.◀ at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure Continued driving with a flat tire Vibrations or loud noises while driving If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ could come loose and cause an accident. Do vers. not continue driving, and contact your service 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. center.◀ 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Intelligent Safety is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize The concept the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ Possible driving distance with complete loss of telligent Safety consists of one or more of the tire inflation pressure: following systems, which can help to avoid an imminent collision. These systems are active The possible driving distance after a loss of tire automatically every time the engine is started inflation pressure depends on the cargo load using the Start/Stop button: and the driving style and conditions. ▷ Collision warning, refer to page 103. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 107. 50 miles/80 km. Note When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ Personal responsibility duced lane stability during braking, a longer The system does not serve as a substi‐ braking distance, and altered self-steering tute for the driver's personal judgment of the properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ traffic situation. ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an Because the possible driving distance de‐ accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 103
Safety Controls
At a glance Collision warning with City Braking function Button in the vehicle The concept The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed. The system issues a warning if there is immi‐ nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐ pendently. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. Intelligent Safety button The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror. Switching on/off The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after each engine start via the start/ When the vehicle is intentionally brought close stop button. to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings. Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out. General information Press the button: the systems are switched off. The system issues a two-phase warning of a The LED lights up. danger of collision with vehicles at speeds Settings can be made on the Control Display. above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Collision warning Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐ vention occurs when appropriate. Depending on how the equipment is equipped, the collision warning system consists of one of Detection range the two systems: ▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐ tion, refer to page 103; ▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐ fer to page 105
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are
103 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 104
Controls Safety
located within the detection range of the sys‐ Symbol Measure tem. The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. At a glance Increase braking and distance.
Button in the vehicle The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma‐ neuver.
Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ tervene. During the warning, the maximum Intelligent Safety button braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight Switching on/off braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a Switching on automatically complete stop. The system is automatically active every time Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ vention up until reaching a complete stop, the ton. engine may be shut down. The braking intervention is executed only if Switching off DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on The system is only switched off until the next and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ time the engine is started with the Start/Stop vated. button. The braking intervention can be interrupted by Press the button. pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ The LED goes out. ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, Warning with braking function switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions. Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver System limits of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving Be alert speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or Display improperly. Therefore, always be alert and If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the ger of an accident occurring.◀ instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 105
Safety Controls
Detection range Collision warning with The system's detection capabilities are limited. braking function This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. The concept For example, the following situations may not The system issues a warning if there is immi‐ be detected: nent danger of a collision and also includes a ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach braking function. them at high speed. If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is you or sharply decelerating vehicles. controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in conjunction with a camera. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. The collision warning is available even if cruise ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. control has been deactivated. ▷ Pedestrians. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to Functional limitations avoid false warnings. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: General information ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a fall. possible danger of collision with vehicles at ▷ In tight curves. speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the ▷ If the driving stability control systems are current driving situation. limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF. Detection range ▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐ sor is dirty or obscured. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this It responds to stationary or moving objects may result in increased false warnings. that are within the detection range of the radar system.
105 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 106
Controls Safety
At a glance The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐ vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is Button in the vehicle accompanied by a braking intervention. The braking intervention is executed with lim‐ ited braking force and for a brief period only. The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking Intelligent Safety button intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
Switching on/off Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver Switching on automatically of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ The braking intervention can be interrupted by ton. pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ ing the steering wheel. Switching off When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, The system is only switched off until the next switch off the collision warning with braking time the engine is started with the Start/Stop function to prevent undesired interventions. button. Press the button. Display in the instrument cluster The LED goes out. The collision warning can be issued in the in‐ strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically. Display
Warning stages
Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed.
106 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 107
Safety Controls
Warning stages Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the Symbol Measure following situations: The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ ing. fall. Increase distance. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are The vehicle flashes red and an limited or deactivated, for example, DSC acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ OFF. ing. ▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐ You are requested to intervene by sor is dirty or obscured. braking or making an evasive ma‐ neuver. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Adapting your speed and driving style ▷ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun The display does not relieve the driver of low in the sky. the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this System limits may result in increased false warnings. Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or Pedestrian warning with city improperly. Therefore, always be alert and braking function ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ The concept The system can help to prevent accidents with Detection range pedestrians. The system's detection capabilities are limited. The system issues a warning in the city driving This may result in the warning not being is‐ speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ sued or being issued late. lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. For example, the following situations may not be detected: The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror. ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. General information ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The system issues a warning with brightness you or sharply decelerating vehicles. staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. collision with pedestrians and assists with a ▷ Pedestrians. brake intervention shortly before a collision.
107 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 108
Controls Safety
It responds to persons that are within the de‐ Camera tection range of the system.
Detection range
The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ The warning area in front of the vehicle is div‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ided into two areas. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Switching on/off vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Switching on automatically left. The system is automatically active every time A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ ton. sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in Switching off the direction of the central area. Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out. At a glance Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up. Button in the vehicle
Warning with braking function Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display If a collision with a person detected in this way Intelligent Safety button is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 109
Safety Controls
Intervene immediately by braking or making an ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such evasive maneuver. because of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. Braking intervention ▷ Pedestrians below a body size of approx. The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ 32 in/80 cm. tervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure Functional limitations on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk The system may not be fully functional or may of collision, the system can assist with a slight not be available in the following situations: braking intervention. The intervention can ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a fall. complete stop. ▷ In tight curves. Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ vention up until reaching a complete stop, the ▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐ engine may be shut down. shield are dirty or covered. The braking intervention is executed only if ▷ When driving toward bright lights. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. vated. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ The braking intervention can be interrupted by ately after vehicle shipment. pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐ ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, Lane departure warning switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent undesired interventions. The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts System limits you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. Depending Be alert on the country-specific version of the vehicle, Due to system limitations, warnings may the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or 45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on improperly. Therefore, always be alert and below this speed, a message appears in the in‐ ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ strument cluster. ger of an accident occurring.◀ The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning Detection range may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ The detection capability of the camera is lim‐ uation. ited. The system does not provide a warning if the This may result in the warning not being is‐ turn signal is set before leaving the lane. sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
109 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 110
Controls Safety
Notes ▷ On: the LED lights up. Personal responsibility ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The system cannot serve as a substitute The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ for the driver's personal judgment of the rently in use. course of the road and the traffic situation. Display in the instrument cluster In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ ▷ Lines: system is activated. cle.◀ ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be At a glance issued.
Button in the vehicle Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning The warning ends: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. Lane departure warning ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. Camera ▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐ ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.
The camera is located near the base of the ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, mirror. ice, dirt or water. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects. Switching on/off ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. Press the button. ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 111
Safety Controls
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior At a glance rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Button in the vehicle ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights The radar sensors are located under the rear up dimly. bumper.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ Switching on/off uations described above. Press the button. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Notes The system can issue warnings at speeds Personal responsibility above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h The system does not serve as a substi‐ The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the rently in use. traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
111 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 112
Controls Safety
Display ▷ NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Information stage Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐ operate this equipment. cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.
Warning Brake force display If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the The concept critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ During normal brake application, the outer ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed brake lamps light up. much faster than your own. ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. brake lamps light up in addition. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered with stickers. Active Protection A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. General information The Active Protection safety package consists For US owners only of systems that are independent of each other: The transmitter and receiver units comply with ▷ Attentiveness assistant. part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ ▷ PreCrash erned by the following: ▷ PostCrash FCC ID:
112 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 113
Safety Controls
Attentiveness assistant After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ The concept mately 45 minutes. The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ System limits notonous journeys, for example, on highways. The function may be limited in the following In this situation, it is recommended that the situations, for instance, and will either output driver take a break. an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. Note ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below Personal responsibility about 43 mph/70 km/h. The system cannot act as a substitute for ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during the personal assessment of one's physical rapid acceleration or when cornering state and may not detect an increasing lack of quickly. alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is changing lanes frequently. rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a ▷ When the road surface is poor. result.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Function PreCrash The system is activated each time the engine The concept is started and cannot be switched off. With this system critical driving situations that After travel has begun, the system is trained might result in an accident can be detected about the driver, so that increasing lack of above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In alertness or fatigue can be detected. these situations, preventative protection This procedure takes the following criteria into measures are automatically undertaken to account: minimize the risk in the event of an accident as ▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐ much as possible. ing behavior. Critical driving situations may include: ▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of ▷ Full brake applications. trip. ▷ Severe understeering. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the ▷ Severe oversteering. system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break. If the vehicle includes the collision warning or collision warning with braking feature, impend‐ Break recommendation ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or stopped in front of you can also be detected If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or within the system's range. fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.
113 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 114
Controls Safety
Note Personal responsibility The system cannot possibly serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system may not al‐ ways detect critical situations reliably and in a timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may result.◀
Function After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts are automatically pretensioned once after the vehicle is driven is away. In critical driving situations, the following indi‐ vidual functions become active as needed: ▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐ sioned. ▷ Automatic closing of the windows. ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ dent, the front belts are loosened again. All other systems can be restored to the desired setting. If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐ cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash In the event of an accident, the system can bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐ tervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof. Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐ hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also interrupts automatic braking. After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 115
Driving stability control systems Controls
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine All standard, country-specific and optional speed and by applying brakes at individual equipment that is offered in the model series is wheels. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a Adjust your driving style to the situation vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional An appropriate driving style is always the equipment or country variant. This also applies responsibility of the driver. for safety-related functions and systems. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety Antilock Brake System ABS margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Indicator/warning lamps The vehicle remains steerable even during full The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ brake applications, thus increasing active trols the drive forces and brake forces. safety. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ failed. gine.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Brake assistant When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system in bends. automatically produces the maximum braking To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐ again as soon as possible. tance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Deactivating DSC Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Press and hold the button, but not lon‐ for the duration of the full braking. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DSC Dynamic Stability The DSC system is switched off. Control Activating DSC The concept Press the button. DSC prevents traction loss in the driving DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator wheels when driving away and accelerating. lamp go out. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
115 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 116
Controls Driving stability control systems
Indicator/warning lamps Deactivating DTC When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ Press the button again. played in the instrument cluster. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is tor lamp go out. deactivated.
xDrive DTC Dynamic Traction xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ Control hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The concept The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ The DTC system is a version of the DSC in tributes the drive forces to the front and rear which forward momentum is optimized. axles as demanded by the driving situation and The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ road surface. mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐ lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ ited. Dynamic Damping Control It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ The concept ate caution. This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ under the following special circumstances: eling on uneven road surfaces. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, The system enhances driving dynamics and snow-covered roads. comfort as required for the road surface and ▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in driving style. deep snow or on loose surfaces. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Programs The system offers several different programs. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic The programs can be selected via the Driving Traction Control Dynamics Control, refer to page 117. Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. SPORT Driving stability is limited during acceleration Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ and when driving in bends. sorbers for greater driving agility. Activating DTC SPORT+ Press the button. Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC with limited driving stabilization. OFF lights up. COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced control of the vehicle.
116 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 117
Driving stability control systems Controls
Variable sport steering DSC OFF When DSC OFF, refer to page 115, is active, The variable sport steering increases the driving stability is limited during acceleration steering angle of the front wheels at large and when driving in bends. steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes more direct. TRACTION It also varies the force required to turn the When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC This results in a sporty steering response. In Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 116, is addition, it becomes easier to steer during activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ parking and maneuvering. celeration and when driving in bends.
SPORT+ Driving Dynamics Control Sporty driving with optimized chassis and adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ The concept bilization. The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle. Various programs can be selected for this pur‐ The driver handles several of the stabilization pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the tasks. DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate a program. Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until Operating the programs SPORT+ appears in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights Press the button Program up.
DSC OFF TRACTION Automatic program change When activating cruise control, the program SPORT+ automatically switches to SPORT mode. SPORT COMFORT Indicator/warning lamps ECO PRO SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Automatic program change Dynamic Traction Control is activated. The system automatically switches to COM‐ FORT in the following situations: SPORT ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control. Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ TION or DSC OFF mode. The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote control currently in use.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
Activating SPORT The program can be configured to individual specifications. Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO Configuring SPORT PRO is displayed in the instrument When the display is activated on the Control cluster. Display, refer to page 118, the SPORT driving mode can be set to individual specifications. Configuring ECO PRO ▷ Activating SPORT. 1. Activate ECO PRO. ▷ "Configure SPORT" 2. "Configure ECO PRO" ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode. Make the desired settings. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ vated: Configure driving mode 1. "Settings" Settings can be made for the following driving 2. "Driving mode" modes in Driving mode: 3. "Configure SPORT" ▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 118. 4. Configure driving mode. ▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 172. This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated. Displays
COMFORT Program selection For a balanced tuning with maximum driving Pressing the button displays a stabilization. list of the selectable programs.
Activating COMFORT Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument Selected program cluster. The selected program is dis‐ In certain situations, the system automatically played in the instrument cluster. changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 117.
ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 171, provides consis‐ Display on the Control Display tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for Program changes can be displayed on the maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ Control Display. zation. 1. "Settings" Comfort functions and the engine controller 2. "Driving mode" are adjusted. 3. "Driving mode info"
118 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 119
Driving stability control systems Controls
Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi‐ ents. The parking brake is not required. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.◀
119 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 120
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment General information When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is All standard, country-specific and optional also set to a driving style that saves on fuel equipment that is offered in the model series is consumption. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a Notes vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies Personal responsibility for safety-related functions and systems. The system does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, distance and driving style to the traffic condi‐ Active Cruise Control with tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current Stop & Go function, ACC traffic events. Intervene actively when neces‐ sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an The concept evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.◀ This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐ cally on clear roads. At a glance To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle Buttons on the steering wheel ahead of you. Press the Function The distance that the vehicle maintains to the button vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. System on/off, interrupt, refer to page 121 To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes Store/maintain speed, refer to lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead page 121 begins moving faster. Resume speed, refer to If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the page 123 system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your Reduce distance, refer to drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is page 122 able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Increase distance, refer to Even if some time passes before the vehicle page 122 drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐ erated automatically and simply. Rocker switch: As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to Change/maintain speed, refer the desired speed. to page 121 The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐ dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.
120 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 121
Driving comfort Controls
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ If switching off the system while stationary, ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐ press on the brake pedal at the same time. try-specific variants. Press the button. Radar sensor ▷ If active: press twice. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the ▷ If interrupted: press once. vehicle. The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.
Interrupting When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐ ▷ When the brakes are applied. tection of vehicles. ▷ When transmission position D is disen‐ ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ gaged. move layers of snow and ice carefully. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar activated or DSC is deactivated. sensor. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are Switching on/off and interrupting opened when the vehicle is standing still. cruise control ▷ If the system has not detected objects for Switching on an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without road edge line Press the button on the steering markings. wheel. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog. light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Maintaining/storing the speed Cruise control can be used. Press the button.
Switching off Or: Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀
121 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 122
Controls Driving comfort
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly terrupted. until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the When the system is switched on, the current vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is speed is maintained and stored as the desired clear. speed. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly the point of resistance, the desired speed displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in increases or decreases by approx. the instrument cluster, refer to page 123. 1 mph/1 km/h. When cruise control is maintained or stored, ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, past the point of resistance, the desired if necessary. speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted to maintain and store the current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Distance is switched on, if necessary. Selecting a distance Adapting the desired speed Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ the prescribed safety distance.◀ curring.◀ Reduce distance Speed differences Large differences in speed relative to ve‐ Press the button repeatedly until the hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐ desired distance is set. sated by the system for example in the follow‐ The selected distance, refer to page 123, is ing situations: displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck. ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves Increase distance into the wrong lane.◀ Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
122 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
The selected distance, refer to page 123, is 2. Release the brake pedal. displayed in the instrument cluster. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES button or the rocker switch when Calling up the desired speed and the vehicle ahead of you drives away. distance Displays in the instrument cluster While driving Press the button with the system Desired speed switched on. ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been ▷ When the system is switched off. interrupted. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it Brief status display against rolling Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ Selected desired speed. ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐ mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐ If --- appears briefly on the display for Check wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ The system brought the vehicle to a complete tem requirements for operation are currently standstill. not met. ▷ Green marking in the speedometer: Distance to vehicle ahead of you Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ The selected distance to the vehicle driving dar sensor moves off. ahead of you is shown. ▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange: Distance display no automatic driving away. Distance 1 To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, press the accelerator briefly or press the RES or SET button. Distance 2 Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range has moved off. Distance 3 Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle: Distance 4 This value is set after the system is 1. Press the button to call up a stored switched on. desired speed.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
Distance display The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary. The system has been interrupted or Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ distance control is deactivated be‐ uation when using the system. cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Detection range Distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.
Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not The detection capacity of the system and the relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt automatic braking capacity are limited. his or her desired driving speed and style to Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you the traffic conditions.◀ for instance might not be detected.
The vehicle symbol lights up orange: Limited detection capacity A vehicle has been detected ahead of Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ you. pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in‐ The vehicle symbol flashes orange: tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there The conditions are not adequate for is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ operating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the Deceleration brakes until you actively assume control by The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator. tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end The vehicle symbol flashes red and an of traffic congestion. acoustic signal sounds: The system also does not respond to: You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver. ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users. System limits ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Stationary objects. Speed range ▷ Cross traffic. Best results are achieved when using the sys‐ ▷ Oncoming traffic. tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
124 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
No warnings Unexpected lane change A warning may not be issued when ap‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ cle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, curves cannot be anticipated in advance. the system requests that the driver intervene Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ speed. vers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident In tight curves, situations may result due to the occurring.◀ restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐ able delay.
125 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.
When approaching a curve, the system may Cruise control react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of The concept the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator The system is functional at speeds beginning pedal is released, the system becomes active at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. again and independently controls the speed. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. Driving away The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐ gine braking action is insufficient. In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or Unfavorable conditions behind bumps in the road. Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ Radar sensor stant speed, for instance: ▷ On curvy roads. For US owners only ▷ In heavy traffic. The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ on a loose road surface. erned by the following: Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ FCC ID: cle and cause an accident.◀ ▷ OAYARS3-A General information Compliance statement: When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is This device complies with part 15 of the FCC also set to a driving style that saves on fuel Rules. Operation is subject to the following consumption. two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
Controls ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ At a glance gaged. ▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ Press the button Function rent speed. Interrupt system on/off ▷ The transmission position D is disengaged. ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Store speed or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. Resume speed Maintaining/storing the current speed
Changing the speed Press the button.
Or Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.
Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if When the system is switched on, the current necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, speed is maintained and stored as the desired there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ speed.
Press the button. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 128. ▷ If active: press twice. When cruise control is maintained or stored, ▷ If interrupted: press once. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, The displays go out. The stored desired speed if necessary. is deleted. Changing/maintaining speed Interrupting the system The rocker switch can be pressed while the When active, press the button. system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed. The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied.
127 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
Adapting the desired speed Displays in the instrument cluster Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ Indicator lamp erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ curring.◀ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on.
Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly ▷ The marking does not light up: the system until the desired speed is set. is switched off. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Brief status display ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to Selected desired speed. the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed tem requirements for operation are currently past the point of resistance, the desired not met. speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ PDC Park Distance Control ance point and holding it there accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring The concept pressure on the accelerator. After the PDC supports you when parking. Objects that rocker switch is released, the vehicle main‐ you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐ tains its final speed. Pressing the switch hind your vehicle are indicated with: beyond the resistance point causes the ve‐ hicle to accelerate more rapidly. ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. Resuming the desired speed Press the button. General information Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐ The stored speed is reached and maintained. sors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given:
128 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two Switching on/off corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. Switching on automatically 5 ft/1.50 m. Select transmission position R with the engine running. Notes Automatic deactivation during forward Check the traffic situation as well travel PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the The system switches off when a certain driving driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ distance or speed is exceeded. tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ Switch the system back on if necessary. dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Switching on/off manually Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐ Press the button. cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.◀ ▷ On: the LED lights up. Avoid driving quickly with PDC ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Avoid approaching an object quickly. In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the rearview camera, refer to page 131, can be Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet switched on. active. For technical reasons, the system may other‐ Switching on the rearview camera via wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: At a glance "Rear view camera" Button in the vehicle The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
Display
Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de‐ tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal PDC Park Distance Control tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object be‐ comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
If objects are located both in front of and be‐ System limits hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐ nal is sounded. Limits of ultrasonic measurement The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐ The detection of objects can reach the physi‐ prox. 3 seconds: cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.: ▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches. is detected by only one of the corner sen‐ ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. sors. ▷ With low objects. ▷ If moving parallel to a wall. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. The signal tone is switched off: Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can ▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐ move into the blind area of the sensors before ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. or after a continuous tone sounds. ▷ When transmission position P is engaged. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected. Volume The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, False warnings refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐ PDC may issue a warning under the following tainment, Communication. conditions even though there is no obstacle The setting is stored for the remote control within the detection range: currently in use. ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in Visual warning ice. The approach of the vehicle to an object can ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control ▷ On rough road surfaces. Display before a signal tone sounds. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and A display appears as soon as Park Distance smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ Control (PDC) is activated. rages. The range of the sensors is represented in the ▷ In heavy exhaust. colors red, green and yellow. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., If the rearview camera image was selected last, sweeping machines, high pressure steam it again appears on the display. To switch to cleaners or neon lights. PDC: The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ ous tone alternating between the front and 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction on the Control Display. due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ 2. Press the controller. ger present, the system is again fully func‐ The setting is stored for the remote control tional. currently in use. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.
130 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded At a glance area on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. Button in the vehicle To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept Rearview camera Surround View comprises various camera as‐ sistance systems that help the driver when Camera parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 131 ▷ Side View, refer to page 133. ▷ Top View, refer to page 135.
Backup camera
The concept The camera lens is located in the handle of the The backup camera provides assistance in trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired parking and maneuvering backwards. The area by dirt. behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Clean the lens, refer to page 219. Display.
Hints Switching on/off
Check the traffic situation as well Switching on automatically Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ Select transmission position R with the engine hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ running. dent could result from road users or objects lo‐ The backup camera image is displayed if the cated outside the picture area of the backup system was switched on via the iDrive. camera.◀ Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.
131 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
Switching on/off manually Pathway lines Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on: ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐ "Rear view camera" age when in transmission position R. The rearview camera image is displayed. The ▷ Help you to estimate the space required setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ when parking and maneuvering on level rently in use. roads. ▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐ Display on the Control Display gle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. Turning circle lines ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. ▷ Parking aid lines "Parking aid lines" Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐ played. ▷ Obstacle marking ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐ age. "Obstacle marking" ▷ Show the course of the smallest possible Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. turning circle on a level road. ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned.
132 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
Obstacle marking 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding General information turning circle line.
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the rearview camera image. Display settings Their colored steps match the markings of the Brightness PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown. With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. Parking using pathway and turning 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting circle lines is reached, and press the controller. 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐ cle lines lead to within the limits of the Contrast parking space. With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the rearview camera.
Side View
The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
133 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt. cle record the traffic situation on each side. Clean the lens, refer to page 219.
Notes Switching on/off The images from both cameras are shown si‐ multaneously on the Control Display. Switching on/off manually Check the traffic situation as well Press the button. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could Automatic deactivation during forward result from road users or objects located out‐ travel side the picture area of the Side View cam‐ The system switches off when a certain driving eras.◀ distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. At a glance Display Button in the vehicle The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.
Side View Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle. Cameras
Brightness With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast With the Side View switched on: Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ ture the image. 1. "Contrast" The two camera lenses are located on the 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting sides of the bumper. is reached, and press the controller.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
System limits Top View The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m. Cameras
Top View
The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneu‐ vering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Con‐ trol Display for this purpose.
General information The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐ The image is captured by two cameras cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the ings. The image quality may be impaired by backup camera. dirt. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and Clean the lens, refer to page 219. rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the Switching on/off exterior mirrors are detected early. Switching on automatically Notes Select transmission position R with the engine Check the traffic situation as well running. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ The Top View and PDC images are displayed if hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ the system is switched on via iDrive. dent could result from road users or objects lo‐ cated outside the picture area of the Automatic deactivation during forward cameras.◀ travel The system switches off when a certain driving At a glance distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. Button in the vehicle Switching on/off manually Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed.
135 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
Switching on the backup camera via Contrast the iDrive With Top View switched on: With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. "Rear view camera" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting The backup camera image is displayed. The is reached, and press the controller. setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines Display ▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle Visual warning when the steering wheel is turned all the The approach of the vehicle to an object can way. be shown on the Control Display. ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists When the distance to an object is small, a red you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in tually needed to the side of the vehicle. the PDC display. The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐ rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐ justed with the steering wheel movement. "Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations: The display appears as soon as Top View is ▷ With a door open. activated. ▷ With the trunk lid open.
If the rearview camera image was selected last, ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. it again appears on the display when reverse ▷ In poor light. gear is selected. To switch to Top View: A Check Control message is displayed in some "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on of these situations. the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Brightness With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
136 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
Parking assistant Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter The concept of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ dent occurring.◀
Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curbs. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ lel to the road. cle may become damaged.◀ Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces An engine that has been switched off by the on both sides of the vehicle. Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated. sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. Requirements When parking, also take note of the visual and For measuring parking spaces acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and react accordingly. ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 128. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Hints Suitable parking space Personal responsibility ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum The parking assistant does not relieve length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. the driver of responsibility for the vehicle dur‐ ▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's ing the parking procedure. length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. Watch the parking space and parking proce‐ ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. dure closely and intervene if necessary; other‐ wise, there is the danger of an accident.◀ For parking procedure Changes to the parking space ▷ Closed doors. Changes to the parking space after it was ▷ Parking brake released. measured are not taken into account by the ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the system. driver's side, the corresponding turn signal Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ must be set. vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ dent occurring.◀
137 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
At a glance Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse. Button in the vehicle The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition. Parking assistant Display on the Control Display Ultrasound sensors Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.
The system is activated.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Status of the system spaces are located on the wheel arches. To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side Switching on with the button of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐ Press the button. sistant is activated and search for parking space active. The LED lights up. ▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next The current status of the parking space search to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the is indicated on the Control Display. road as on the Control Display. When the Parking assistant is activated automatically. parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.
138 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ Interrupting automatically tive. Steering control has The system is interrupted automatically in the been seized. following situations: ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering. ▷ Parking space search is always active ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match whenever the vehicle is moving forwards the instruction on the Control Display. slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite the displays on the Control Display are direction to the desired side for parking. shown in gray. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. Parking using the parking assistant ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces Check the traffic situation as well if necessary. Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐ ▷ If doors are open. cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐ ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to ing assistant and PDC. overcome, such as curbs. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the arise. danger of an accident.◀ ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ or the time taken for parking is exceeded. vate it if necessary. A Check Control message is displayed. The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Continuing 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ play. tinued if necessary. To achieve the best possible parking posi‐ Follow the instructions on the Control Display tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel to do this. movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary. System limits The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. No parking assistance 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐ The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ essary. tance in the following situations: ▷ In tight curves. Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any Functional limitations time: The system may not be fully functional in the ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol following situations: on the Control Display. ▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over. ▷ Press the button. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
139 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel Head-up Display roads. ▷ On slippery ground. The concept ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi‐ cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches. This system projects important information ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as In this way, the driver can get information with‐ ledges or cargo. out averting his or her eyes from the road. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure, Display visibility such as fences. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can Display is influenced by: move into the blind area of the sensors before ▷ Certain sitting positions. or after a continuous tone sounds. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ High, protruding objects such as ledges may play. not be detected. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. Malfunction If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ A Check Control message is displayed. tings. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked. Switching on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview ▷ Speed. ▷ Navigation system. ▷ Check Control messages. ▷ Collision warning.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
▷ Speed limit detection. Setting the rotation ▷ Cruise control. 1. "Settings" ▷ Pedestrian warning. 2. "Head-Up Display" ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 3. "Rotation" Some of this information is only displayed 4. Turn the controller. briefly as needed. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Special windshield 1. "Settings" The windshield is part of the system. 2. "Head-Up Display" The shape of the windshield makes it possible 3. "Displayed information" to display a precise image. 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ Display. ages from being displayed. The settings are stored for the remote control Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ currently in use. placed by a service center only.
Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐ ing. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
141 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 142
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 50 6 Temperature 2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 50 3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode 5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
142 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 143
Climate control Controls
Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 143, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Manual air distribution gram. Turn the wheel to select the de‐ Temperature sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. Turn the wheel to set the de‐ sired temperature.
▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. The automatic climate control reaches this ▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ well. sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐ ▷ Footwell. put, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ Defrosting windows and removing perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ condensation mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ just the set temperature. crease the air flow and temperature, and, if necessary, use the cooling function. Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be Rear window defroster cooled with the engine running. Press the button. Press the button. The rear window defroster switches The air is cooled and dehumidified off automatically after a certain period of time. and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. Air flow, manual Depending on the weather, the windshield may Press the left or right side of the but‐ fog up briefly when the engine is started. ton: decrease or increase air flow. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐ cally with the AUTO program. duced automatically to save battery power. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 166, devel‐ AUTO program ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Press the button. Recirculated-air mode Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically. You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Depending on the selected temperature and rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The outside influences, the air is directed to the system then recirculates the air currently windshield, side windows, upper body, and within the vehicle. into the footwell. Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
143 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 144
Controls Climate control
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Switching on ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply Press any button except of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ ▷ Rear window defroster. nently blocked. ▷ Seat heating. If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air volume, if Microfilter necessary. In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ Continuous recirculated-air mode crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air. The recirculated-air mode should not be This filter should be replaced during scheduled used for an extended period of time, as the air maintenance, refer to page 196, of your vehi‐ quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ cle. ily.◀
Switching the system on/off
Switching off Press the left button for the minimum speed.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 50 3 AUTO program 2 Temperature, left 4 Display
144 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 145
Climate control Controls
5 Maximum cooling 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity 6 Temperature, right 12 Air distribution, left 7 Seat heating, right 50 13 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep 9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ clear lated-air mode 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐ 10 Air distribution, right sation
Climate control functions in detail Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐ Temperature matic control of the air flow and air distribution Turn the wheel to set the de‐ can be adjusted. sired temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity.
The automatic climate control reaches this The selected intensity is shown on the display temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ of the automatic climate control. sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐ put, and then keeps it constant. Maximum cooling Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ Press the button. perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ The system is set to the lowest tem‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation just the set temperature. mode.
AUTO program Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this. Press the button. The air is cooled fastest when the engine is Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐ running. perature are controlled automatically. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ Depending on the selected temperature, the gram is active. AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, Cooling function upper body, and into the footwell. The passenger compartment can only be The cooling function, refer to page 145, is cooled with the engine running. switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Press the button. gram. The air is cooled and dehumidified At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ and – depending on the temperature setting – trols the program so as to prevent window warmed again. condensation as much as possible. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.
145 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 146
Controls Climate control
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: cally with the AUTO program. driver's side only. When using the automatic climate control, If the windows are fogged over, press the condensation water, refer to page 166, devel‐ AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. sor.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ Air flow, manual recirculated-air mode To be able to manually adjust the air flow, You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ switch off the AUTO program first. tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Press the left or right side of the but‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The ton: decrease or increase air flow. system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. The selected air flow is shown on the display of Press the button repeatedly to select the automatic climate control. an operating mode: The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. power. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the Rear window defroster outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐ Press the button. matically. The rear window defroster switches ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the off automatically after a certain period of time. supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the Defrosting windows and removing recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO condensation button to utilize the condensation sensor. Press the button. Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐ Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ shield. moved from the windshield and the front side Continuous recirculated-air mode windows.
The recirculated-air mode should not be The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ used for an extended period of time, as the air gram is active. quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ ily.◀ If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ Manual air distribution sor. Press the button repeatedly to select a program: Switching the system on/off
▷ Upper body region. Switching off ▷ Upper body region and footwell. Press the left button for the minimum ▷ Footwell. speed. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
146 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 147
Climate control Controls
Switching on Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. Press any button except Ventilation in the rear ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Seat heating.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 196, of your vehi‐ cle. ▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1. Ventilation ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 2. Front ventilation Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐ arrow 1. essary. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the The system can be switched on and off at any vents continuously, arrows 2. external temperature, either directly or by us‐ ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ ing two preset switch-on times. It remains row 3. switched on for 30 minutes. Toward blue: colder. Open the vents to allow air to flow out. Toward red: warmer. Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Adjusting the ventilation Switching on/off directly ▷ Ventilation for cooling: 1. "Settings" Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐ 2. "Climate" rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot 3. "Activate comf. ventilation" from the sun. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ ▷ Draft-free ventilation: trol flashes if the system is switched on.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 148
Controls Climate control
Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐ vated. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐ vated.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 149
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Compatibility All standard, country-specific and optional If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ equipment that is offered in the model series is ing or in the instructions of the system described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ to be controlled, the system is gener‐ ment is also described that is not available in a ally compatible with the integrated universal vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional remote control. equipment or country variant. This also applies If you have any questions, please contact: for safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Your service center. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Integrated universal remote HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐ control son Controls, Inc.
The concept Controls on the interior rearview The integrated universal remote control can mirror operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote con‐ trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐ mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote con‐ trol. ▷ LED, arrow 1. During programming ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. During programming and before activat‐ ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ ing a device using the integrated universal re‐ quired for programming. mote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, Programming there is a risk of injury or damage. General information Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup: Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
149 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 150
Controls Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior the interior rearview mirror. rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to features an alternating-code system. Flashing 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds. pends on the manual transmitter. For systems with an alternating-code system, 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button the integrated universal remote control and the of the desired function on the hand-held system also have to be synchronized. transmitter and the button to be program‐ Please read the operating manual of the sys‐ med on the interior rearview mirror. The tem being set up for information on how to LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ synchronize the system. gin flashing slowly. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED ond person. flashes more rapidly. When the LED is To synchronize: flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐ ton on the interior rearview mirror has been 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ programmed. mote-controlled system. If the LED does not flash faster after at 2. Program the relevant button on the interior least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ rearview mirror as described. tween the interior rearview mirror and the 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. on the system being programmed. You Several more attempts at different distan‐ have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. ces may be necessary. Wait at least 4. Hold down the programmed button on the 15 seconds between attempts. interior rearview mirror for approximately Canada: if programming with the hand- 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, held transmitter was interrupted, hold repeat this work step up to three times in down the interior rearview mirror button order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐ and repeatedly press and release the chronization is complete, the programmed hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ function will be carried out. onds. 6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition. The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror rior rearview mirror buttons. button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED Special feature of the alternating- starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held code wireless system transmitter for the system to be controlled If you are unable to operate the system after approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the repeated programming, please check if the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The system to be controlled features an alternat‐ required distance depends on the manual ing-code system. transmitter. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐
150 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 151
Interior equipment Controls
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this Digital compass indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. At a glance The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button and repeatedly press and release the 2 Mirror display hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Mirror display Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the Before operation mirror when driving straight. Before operating a system using the Operating concept integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects Various functions can be called up by pressing within the range of movement of the remote- the control button with a pointed object, such controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. injury or damage. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- trol button is pressed: held transmitter.◀ ▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. The system, such as the garage door, can be ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering the button within receiving range of the system setting. until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ Deleting stored functions cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ Press and hold the left and right button on the fer to World map with compass zones. interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
151 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 152
Controls Interior equipment
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to 2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle. trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. number of the compass zone correspond‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ ing to your location appears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ on the display. Next, drive in a complete pass is ready for use again after approximately circle at least once at a speed of no more 10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of Calibrating the digital compass the compass. The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering ▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐ The digital compass is already set for right or played. left-hand steering at the factory. ▷ The point of the compass displayed does Setting the language not change despite changing the direction of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control ▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ button again to switch between English "E" played. and German "O".
152 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 153
Interior equipment Controls
The setting is stored automatically after ap‐ proximately 10 seconds.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical Raise cover. devices
Emptying Hints Take out the insert. Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the Lighter factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this Danger of burns may damage the battery.◀ Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ Replace the cover after use erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after Switch off the ignition and take the remote use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter control with you when leaving the vehicle so socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀ Sockets Replace the cover after use The lighter socket can be used as a socket for Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter ning or when the ignition is switched on. The socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.
153 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 154
Controls Interior equipment
Front center console In the cargo area
Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐ The socket is located on the left side in the rette lighter. cargo area.
In the front passenger footwell USB interface for data transfer
The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 34. ▷ Music collection, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ The socket is located below the glove com‐ cation. partment. ▷ Importing trips, see user's manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication. Rear center console Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance
Remove the cover.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ partment.
154 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 155
Interior equipment Controls
With Professional navigation system Hints or TV: at a glance Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in the area of movement and that no one reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.◀
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ Lock the rear seat backrests in position rest. Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, place the seat backrest as far as pos‐ sible at an angle at which the child seat is rest‐ Notes ing firmly against the backrest and all back‐ Observe the following when connecting: rests can be locked securely in place. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Otherwise, the child seat will not be as stable nector into the USB interface. as it should be, and there is increased danger ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or of injury due to unexpected movement of the lamps to the USB interface. seat backrest.◀ ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. Opening ▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.
Through-loading system
The concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts 1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo at a ratio of 60 to 40. area to release the rear seat backrest. If equipped with through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20– 40. The sides can be folded down separately or to‐ gether.
155 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 156
Controls Interior equipment
2. The unlocked backrest moves forward slightly.
3. Fold backrest forward.
Closing Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it. Ensure that the lock is securely engaged Make sure that the lock engages prop‐ erly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and en‐ danger the vehicle occupants.◀ To secure cargo, refer to page 168, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull the middle sec‐ tion forward.
156 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 157
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 158. All standard, country-specific and optional ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Storage compartment between the rear ment is also described that is not available in a seats, refer to page 159 vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Glove compartment
Front passenger side Notes Note No loose objects in the passenger com‐ partment Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other‐ Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ wise, they may present a danger to occupants ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐ cur during accidents.◀ neuvers.◀ Opening Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀
Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: Pull the handle. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, The light in the glove compartment switches refer to page 158. on. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger The net in the glove compartment is provided side, refer to page 157. for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder, refer to page 159. ▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage compartment, in front of the cupholders, refer to page 158. Closing ▷ Storage compartment in the front center Fold up the cover. armrest, refer to page 158.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 158
Controls Storage compartments
Locking Front storage compartment The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 39, for example. This prevents access to the glove compart‐ ment and to the cargo area. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side Raise the lid to open it.
Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ Compartments in the doors mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ Do not stow any breakable objects ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. cur during accidents.◀ glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ Opening cident.◀
Center armrest
Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.
Opening Pull the handle.
Closing Fold up the cover.
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions.
158 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 159
Storage compartments Controls
Connection for an external audio Storage tray for front cupholders device The cupholder with the storage tray can be . used for additional storage. To do this, place the storage tray in the cupholder. Description, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment Only use the storage tray for small objects, and Communication. such as keys or the remote control. When not in use, stow the storage tray in the glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray into the net so that the top surface faces up. Storage compartment Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray. between the rear seats Rear There is a storage compartment between the rear seats. In the center armrest.
Cupholders
Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. Unsuitable containers To close: push both covers back in, one after Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ the other. tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀ Pushing back the covers Push back the covers before folding up Front the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀
159 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 160
Controls Storage compartments
Clothes hooks Hooks/multi-function hook
To fold up, press on the top or bottom edge. A multi-function hook is located on each side of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks Do not obstruct view can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg. When suspending clothing from the Light and suitable objects only hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's vision.◀ Only hang light bags or suitable objects from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger No heavy objects of objects flying about during braking and eva‐ Do not hang heavy objects from the sive maneuvers. hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ has been appropriately secured.◀ neuvers.◀ Retaining strap A retaining strap is available on the right side Storage compartments in the trim for fastening small objects. cargo area Lashing eyes in the cargo area Storage compartment To secure the cargo, refer to page 168, there A storage compartment is located on the left are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. side. Located on the right side is a storage compart‐ Floor net ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to The floor net can also be used to Secure the page 198, and first aid kit, refer to page 211. load, refer to page 168, and to store small parts. Net Small objects can be stowed in the net on the Storage compartment under cargo left side. floor panel Maximum load To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/ 20 kg in the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel.◀
160 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 161
Storage compartments Controls
Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch at top, if necessary, arrow 2.
Partitioning the compartment The compartment can be divided using an at‐ tachable partition.
161 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 164
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ All standard, country-specific and optional prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized equipment that is offered in the model series is contact and wear patterns between brake described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during ment is also described that is not available in a this break-in period. vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies Clutch for safety-related functions and systems. The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. Breaking-in period 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently. General information Following part replacement Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned The following instructions will help achieve a above have to be renewed in the course of the long vehicle life and good economy. vehicle's operating life. Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit. General driving notes
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Closing the trunk lid Do not exceed the maximum engine and road Drive with the trunk lid closed speed: Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and wise, in the event of an accident or braking and 100 mph/160 km/h. evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ users may be injured, and the vehicle may be stances. damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ter the passenger compartment.◀ From 1,200 miles/2,000 km If driving with the tailgate open cannot be The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be avoided: increased. ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Tires ▷ Greatly increase the blower speed. Due to technical factors associated with their ▷ Drive moderately. manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 165
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system Driving through water Hot exhaust system Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this High temperatures are generated in the height, no faster than walking speed, up to exhaust system. 6 mph/10 km/h. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐ that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, tions grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot Do not exceed this water depth and walking exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐ speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the sition mode, or when parked. Such contact electrical systems and the transmission may could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ be damaged.◀ ous personal injury as well as property dam‐ age. Braking safely Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ there is the danger of getting burned.◀ ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective Mobile communication devices in the way of braking in situations when this is neces‐ vehicle sary. Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐ hicle ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐ minimum of steering effort. munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from side the vehicle without connecting them di‐ the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the active mode. vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐ Objects in the area around the pedals tion, there is no assurance that the radiation No objects in the area around the pedals generated during transmission will be dis‐ charged from the vehicle interior.◀ Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be Hydroplaning impeded while driving On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can Do not place additional floor mats over existing form between the tires and road surface. mats or other objects. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ Only use floor mats that have been approved ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in loss of contact between the tires and the road place. surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ Hydroplaning ing, for example.◀ When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
165 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 166
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Driving in wet conditions Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the When roads are wet coated with road salt or brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐ there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐ fect that generally cannot be corrected. sure on the brake pedal every few miles. Condensation under the parked Ensure that this action does not endanger vehicle other road users. When using the automatic climate control, The heat generated in this process helps dry condensation water develops that exits under‐ the brake discs and pads. neath the vehicle. In this way braking efficiency will be available Traces of water under the vehicle like this are when you need it. normal. Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐ sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ ciency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐ tamination on the brake pads are furthered by: ▷ Low mileage. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached.
166 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 167
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle equipment vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. All standard, country-specific and optional 2. Determine the combined weight of the equipment that is offered in the model series is driver and passengers that will be riding in described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ your vehicle. ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver equipment or country variant. This also applies and passengers from XXX kilograms or for safety-related functions and systems. YYY pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ Hints pacity. Overloading the vehicle For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐ passengers in your vehicle, the amount of ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = increases the rate at which damage develops 400 lbs. inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ No fluids in the trunk cle. That weight may not safely exceed the Make sure that fluids do not leak into the available cargo and luggage load capacity trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ calculated in Step 4. aged.◀ Load Determining the load limit
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
167 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 168
Driving tips Loading
Stowing cargo ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests area floor. to stow cargo. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of Securing cargo the backrests. ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps, the floor net or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with Securing cargo cargo straps. Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or Lashing eyes in the cargo area draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be To secure the cargo there are four lashing thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ eyes in the cargo area. den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐ pants.◀
Floor net The floor net can also be used to Secure the Roof-mounted luggage rack load and to store small parts. Note Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 169
Loading Driving tips
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward.
Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
169 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 170
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close the windows and glass All standard, country-specific and optional sunroof equipment that is offered in the model series is Driving with the glass sunroof and windows described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ open results in increased air resistance and ment is also described that is not available in a raises fuel consumption. vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Tires
General information General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in Your vehicle contains advanced technology for various ways, for instance fuel consumption the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ can be influenced by the size of the tires. sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check the tire inflation pressure ferent factors. regularly The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐ ing style and regular maintenance can have an tion pressure at least twice a month and before influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ starting on a long trip. ronmental impact. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while Remove attached parts the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving following use right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage reach its operating temperature. racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Look well ahead when dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.
170 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 171
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ mined by other factors, such as driving style, Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ road conditions, maintenance or environmental ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. factors. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into Switch off any functions that the highest applicable gear and drive with the are not currently needed engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ stant speed. Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers consume additional fuel, especially in city and fuel consumption and reduces wear. stop-and-go traffic. The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi‐ Therefore, switch off these functions if they cates the most fuel efficient gear. are not actually needed.
Use coasting conditions Have maintenance carried When approaching a red light, take your foot out off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the Have the maintenance carried out by your accelerator and let the vehicle roll. service center. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ tem, refer to page 196. Switch off the engine during longer stops ECO PRO Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic The concept congestion. ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle climate control output, are adjusted. automatically switches off the engine during a In addition, context-sensitive instructions can stop. be displayed that assist in driving in a manner If the engine is switched off and then restarted that optimizes fuel consumption. rather than leaving the engine running con‐ The extension of the range that is achieved as stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are a result can be displayed in the instrument reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ cluster. onds of switching off the engine. Using this system can cause certain compo‐ At a glance nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐ The system includes the following turely. EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
171 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 172
Driving tips Saving fuel
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 172. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or page 173 cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel consumption can be economized. ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 172. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced. Activating ECO PRO The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold. Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument ECO PRO potential cluster. The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is Configuring ECO PRO displayed.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control Display in the instrument cluster 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" ECO PRO bonus range 3. Configure the program. An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driv‐ Via the iDrive ing style. 1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the 2. "ECO PRO mode" bonus range in the instrument cluster. Or The bonus range is shown in the range display. 1. "Settings" The bonus range is automatically reset every 2. "Driving mode" time the vehicle is refueled. 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program. Driving style
ECO PRO Tip ▷ "Tip at:": Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed. ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐ dicates the current efficiency of the driving "ECO PRO climate control" style. The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐ Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for cient. energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
172 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 173
Saving fuel Driving tips
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display Symbol Measure when accelerating. Automatic transmission: switch The efficiency of the driving style is shown by from M/S to D and avoid manual the color of the bar: shift interventions. ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range. Manual shift transmission: follow ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by shifting instructions. backing off the accelerator pedal. Manual shift transmission: engage The display switches to blue as soon as all neutral for engine stop. conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met. Indications on the Control Display ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction EfficientDynamics The arrow indicates that the Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ driving style can be adjusted to ogy can be displayed during driving. be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" Note Displaying fuel consumption history The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ the instrument cluster appear when the ECO played within an adjustable time frame. PRO display is activated. Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips: lected time frame. 1. "Settings" Trip interruptions are represented below the 2. "Info display" bar on the time axis. 3. "ECO PRO Info" "Consumption history"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols Adjusting fuel consumption history An additional symbol and a text instruction are time frame displayed. Select the symbol.
Symbol Measure Resetting fuel consumption history For efficient driving style, back off 1. Open "Options". the accelerator or delay accelerating 2. "Reset consumption history" to allow time to assess road condi‐ tions. Displaying EfficientDynamics info Reduce speed to the selected ECO The current efficiency can be displayed. PRO speed. "EfficientDynamics info" The following systems are displayed: ▷ Automatic engine start-stop function.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 174
Driving tips Saving fuel
▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low ▷ Climate control output. or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ sive current. ▷ Coasting. ▷ Cruise control activated. Display ECO PRO tips Functional requirements "ECO PRO Tips" In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in The setting is stored for the profile currently in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ use. prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied: Coasting ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not The concept operated. The system helps to conserve fuel. ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ tion D. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating sion when transmission position D is engaged. temperature. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐ Display sion position D remains engaged. Display in the instrument cluster This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ ing. The mark in the bar display be‐ As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is low the tachometer is backlit in depressed, the engine is automatically coupled blue and is located at the zero to the transmission again. point. The tachometer approxi‐ mately indicates idle speed. Hints The coasting point indicator is illuminated at Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ the zero point during coasting. fer to page 171, driving mode. The function is available in a certain speed Indications on the Control Display range. The Coasting driving condition is displayed in A forward-looking driving style helps the driver EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode to use the function as often as possible and is active. supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐ ing.
Safety mode The function is not available if one of the fol‐ lowing conditions is satisfied. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.
174 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 175
Saving fuel Driving tips
Functional requirement The function is only available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO Analyser
Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "EfficientDynamics" Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting. 3. Select the symbol.
Display Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle Info" Display on the Control Display 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ ure ECO PRO, refer to page 172, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill. The setting is stored for the profile currently in use. The display of the ECO PRO Analysers con‐ sists of a symbolized road route and a lookup ECO PRO Analyser table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ The concept ing style. The more efficient the driving style, The system helps in this situation to develop the smoother the depicted road route be‐ an especially efficient driving style and to con‐ comes, arrow 1. serve fuel. The table of values contains stars. The more For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ The assessment is done in various categories cluded in the table and the faster the bonus and is displayed on the Control Display. range increases, arrow 2. Using this indication, the individual driving If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed. The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO The range of the vehicle can be extended by PRO tips are displayed during the drive. an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument Tips about the energy saving driving style, cluster and on the Control Display. Conserving fuel, refer to page 170.
175 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 178
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
General information 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached Refuel promptly to the fuel filler flap. Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Fuel cap
Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ ample.
178 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 179
Refueling Mobility
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To do this, turn the cap.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀
179 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 180
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment Gasoline quality BMW recommends AKI 91. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is Minimum fuel grade described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a BMW recommends AKI 89. vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Minimum fuel grade equipment or country variant. This also applies Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ for safety-related functions and systems. mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ formance.◀ Fuel recommendation If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds Gasoline when starting at high outside temperatures. For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should This has no effect on the engine life. be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuel quality Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result taining metal must not be used. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ out metallic additives. ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ ronmental conditions such as high ambient Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur. line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ converter and other components.◀ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. gine deposits, it is highly recommended to Ethanol should satisfy the following quality purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐ standards: ers. US: ASTM 4806–xx Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx tenance.◀ xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀
180 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 181
Wheels and tires Mobility
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to All standard, country-specific and optional page 182, contains all pressure specifications equipment that is offered in the model series is for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐ described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐ ment is also described that is not available in a proved tire sizes and recommended tire vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional brands. This information can be obtained from equipment or country variant. This also applies your service center. for safety-related functions and systems. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire inflation pressure ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ Tire inflation pressures up to sure influence the following: 100 mph/160 km/h ▷ The service life of the tires. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for ▷ Road safety. optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer ▷ Driving comfort. to page 182, and adjust as necessary. Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ These pressure values can also be found on sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ door pillar. serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition Maximum permissible speed that may not only compromise your vehicle's Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ driving stability, but also lead to tire damage wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ and the risk of an accident.◀ After correcting the tire inflation pressure: ▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. ▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
181 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 182
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure values up to Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 100 mph/160 km/h tions in bar/PSI
428i, 428i xDrive Front: 225/35 R 20 2.4 / 35 - 90 Y XL RSC - 2.8 / 41 Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Rear: 255/30 R 20 tions in bar/PSI 92 Y XL RSC
Specifications in Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of bar/PSI with cold T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h tires M 4.2 / 60
225/50 R 17 94 V M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 435i, 435i xDrive +S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M Tire size Pressure specifica‐ +S A/S RSC tions in bar/PSI 225/50 R 17 94 W Specifications in RSC bar/PSI with cold 225/45 R 18 91 Y tires RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M 225/50 R 17 94 V M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 +S RSC +S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M 225/45 R 18 91 V M +S XL RSC +S A/S RSC 225/40 R 19 93 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 225/50 R 17 94 W +S XL A/S RSC RSC
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 91 Y RSC 94 W RSC - 2.2 / 32 Rear: 225/50 R 17 94 H M 255/45 R 17 98 W +S RSC RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32 225/40 R 19 93 V M 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38 Rear: +S XL A/S RSC 255/40 R 18 95 Y Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - RSC 94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35 Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - Rear: 89 Y RSC - 2.3 / 33 255/45 R 17 98 W Rear: RSC 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC
182 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 183
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire inflation pressure values over tions in bar/PSI 100 mph/160 km/h
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 428i, 428i xDrive 91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 Rear: Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 255/40 R 18 95 Y tions in bar/PSI RSC Specifications in Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - bar/PSI with cold 89 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 tires Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y 225/50 R 17 94 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 RSC +S A/S RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 225/50 R 17 94 W 90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 RSC Rear: 255/30 R 20 225/50 R 17 94 H M 92 Y XL RSC +S RSC
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of 225/45 R 18 91 V M 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h +S A/S RSC M 4.2 / 60 225/40 R 19 93 V M +S XL A/S RSC Tire inflation pressures at max. 225/45 R 18 91 Y speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h RSC Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 225/45 R 18 95 V M +S XL RSC In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, Front: 225/50 R 17 2.4 / 35 - and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for 94 W RSC - 2.7 / 39 speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Rear: relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ 255/45 R 17 98 W wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 91 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 89 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC
183 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 184
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 - 90 Y XL RSC - 3.1 / 45 91 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/30 R 20 Rear: 92 Y XL RSC 255/40 R 18 95 Y RSC Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 - M 4.2 / 60 89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 435i, 435i xDrive 255/35 R 19 92 Y RSC
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 - tions in bar/PSI 90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 Specifications in Rear: 255/30 R 20 bar/PSI with cold 92 Y XL RSC tires Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h 225/50 R 17 94 V M 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 M 4.2 / 60 +S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 W RSC Tire identification marks 225/50 R 17 94 H M +S RSC Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y 225/45 R 18 91 V M 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 +S A/S RSC 245: nominal width in mm (Without high-speed 45: aspect ratio in % tuning feature) R: radial tire code 225/45 R 18 91 Y 18: rim diameter in inches RSC 96: load rating, not for ZR tires 225/45 R 18 95 V M Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires +S XL RSC
225/40 R 19 93 V M 2.9 /42 3.2 / 46 Speed letter +S XL A/S RSC T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h Front: 225/50 R 17 2.5 / 36 - V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h 94 W RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h 255/45 R 17 98 W Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h RSC
184 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 185
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire Identification Number ing habits, service practices and differences in DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013 road characteristics and climate. xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Traction xxx: tire size and tire design The traction grades, from highest to lowest, 1013: tire age are AA, A, B, and C. Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of Those grades represent the tire's ability to the U.S. Department of Transportation. stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance. 10th week 2013. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering, Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 6 years. Temperature Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Temperature A Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire DOT Quality Grades life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger Traction AA A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Temperature A B C Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law. grades. Temperature grade for this tire Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or ernment test course. For example, a tire in combination, can cause heat buildup and graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, possible tire failure. times as well on the government course as a If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
185 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 186
Mobility Wheels and tires
RSC – Run-flat tires Tire damage Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters General information RSC marked on the sidewall. Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold Notes weather performance than summer tires. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and Tire tread suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ Summer tires ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your 0.12 in/3 mm. speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: Winter tires ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ 0.16 in/4 mm. dency to pull to the left or right. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over less suitable for winter operation. curbs, road damage, or similar things. In case of tire damage Minimum tread depth If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other‐ wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐ pants.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the Repair of tire damage tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ For safety reasons, the manufacturer of quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. your vehicle recommends that you do not have They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀
186 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 187
Wheels and tires Mobility
Changing wheels and tires Recommended tire brands
Mounting Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ Wheel and tire combination hicle recommends certain tire brands. These Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐ can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be With proper use, these tires meet the highest obtained from your service center. standards for safety and handling. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as New tires ABS or DSC. Due to technical factors associated with their To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ manufacture, tires do not achieve their full sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ traction potential until after an initial breaking- figuration from a single manufacturer. in period. Following tire damage, have the original wheel Drive conservatively for the first and tire combination remounted on the vehicle 200 miles/300 km. as soon as possible. Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ mends that you use only wheels and tires that ommend the use of retreaded tires. have been approved for your particular vehicle Retreaded tires model. Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ For example, despite having the same official sign and age of the tire casing structures can size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐ limit service life and have a negative impact on tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. road safety.◀ The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ Winter tires mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends cle if they are mounted.◀ winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 ℉/+7 ℃. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐ formance as winter tires.
187 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
Maximum speed of winter tires Run-flat tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, Label then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐ cidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires RSC label on the tire sidewall. If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with The wheels are composed of special rims and the same kind. No spare tire is available in the tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ case of a flat tire. Your service center will be gree. glad to advise you. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the Rotating wheels between axles event of a pressure loss. The manufacturer of your vehicle advises Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to against switching wheels between the front page 102. and rear axles. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to This can impair the handling characteristics. page 99. Storage Changing run-flat tires Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No as little exposure to light as possible. spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, Your service center will be glad to advise you. grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recom‐ mended. Consult your service center for more informa‐ tion.
Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:
188 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 189
Wheels and tires Mobility
▷ 205/60 R 16. ▷ 225/55 R 16. ▷ 225/50 R 17. ▷ 225/45 R 18. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 190
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Oil filler neck 2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir 3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment. 5 Engine compartment fuse box
190 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 191
Engine compartment Mobility
Hood Indicator/warning lamps When the hood is opened, a Check Control Hints message is displayed. Working in the engine compartment Closing the hood Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐ Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 ment in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. Never reach into the intermediate spaces or The hood must audibly engage on both sides. gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot Hood open when driving parts.◀ If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ Fold down wiper arm mediately and close it securely.◀ Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this Danger of pinching may result in damage.◀ Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Opening the hood 1. Pull lever in the interior: Engine is released, arrow 1.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again: Hood can be opened, arrow 2.
191 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 192
Mobility Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment 3. "Engine oil level" All standard, country-specific and optional Oil level display messages equipment that is offered in the model series is Different messages appear on the display de‐ described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these ment is also described that is not available in a messages. vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US for safety-related functions and systems. quart/liter of oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil. General information Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately; The engine oil consumption is dependent on otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐ the driving style and driving conditions. When age.◀ a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil consumption, for example, is clearly higher. Detailed measurement Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. The concept In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Checking the oil level During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ electronically creased somewhat.
Status display General information A detailed measurement is only possible with The concept certain engines. The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display. Requirements If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral check control message is displayed. position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed. Requirements ▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in Depending on the previous displays, the status transmission position N or P and accelera‐ display is displayed when the engine is running tor not depressed. or after the vehicle has been driven for at least ▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is 30 minutes. running at operating temperature. Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"
192 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 193
Engine oil Mobility
Performing a detailed measurement Oil types for refilling In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level: Hints 1. "Vehicle Info" No oil additives 2. "Vehicle status" Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ 3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" Viscosity grades for engine oils The oil level is checked and displayed via a When selecting an engine oil, ensure that scale. the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity Duration: approx. 1 minute. grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀ Adding engine oil The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Filler neck Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐ able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30.
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE. When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km. Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service Do not add too much engine oil center. When too much engine oil is added, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, Alternative oil types this may cause engine damage.◀ If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following Protect children specification can be added: Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ Gasoline engine dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.◀ API SM or superior grade specification.
Oil change An oil change should be carried out by your service center only.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 194
Mobility Engine oil
194 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 195
Coolant Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle equipment Adding engine oil 1. Let the engine cool. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐ ment is also described that is not available in a cess pressure to dissipate, and then open vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional it. equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.◀ 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up Suitable additives to the specified level; do not overfill. Only use suitable additives; otherwise, 4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. engine damage may occur. The additives are The arrows on the coolant reservoir and harmful to your health.◀ the cap must point towards one another. Coolant consists of water and additives. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐ ter for suitable additives. Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ Coolant level tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives. Checking Marks are provided on the side of the coolant reservoir. Symbol Meaning
Maximum
Minimum
1. Let the engine cool. 2. The coolant level is correct when it is be‐ tween these two marks.
195 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 196
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ All standard, country-specific and optional tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ equipment that is offered in the model series is count. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a If this occurs, have a service center update the vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional time-dependent maintenance procedures, equipment or country variant. This also applies such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, for safety-related functions and systems. changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter.
BMW Maintenance System Service history The maintenance system directs you to re‐ quired maintenance measures and thereby Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐ supports you in maintaining road safety and ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data. the operational reliability of the vehicle. The entries are like a service booklet of the documentation of regular maintenance. Displaying entered maintenance work on the Condition Based Service Control Display, refer to page 81. CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service and Warranty count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Information Booklet for US Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ mines the maintenance requirements. models and Warranty and The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for amount of maintenance you need to your user Canadian models profile. Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ Detailed information on service requirements, formation Booklet for US models and Warranty refer to page 80, can be displayed on the Con‐ and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ trol Display. els for additional information on service re‐ quirements. Service data in the remote control Maintenance and repair should be performed Information on the required maintenance is by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ continuously stored in the remote control. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the Your service center will read out this data and vehicle's Service and Warranty Information suggest the right array of service procedures Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty for your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ mote control with which the vehicle was driven nance. most recently.
196 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 197
Maintenance Mobility
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle emissions.
Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Canadian model: warning light indi‐ cates the engine symbol. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.
Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐ ened, the display should go out in a short time.
197 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 198
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit 4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch. 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. Folding down wipers before opening the hood Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the the windshield to prevent damage.◀ right side in the cargo area in a storage com‐ partment. Open the cover. Lamp and bulb replacement
Wiper blade replacement Hints
Note Lamps and bulbs Do not fold down the wipers without Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ wiper blades tion to vehicle safety. Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends have not been installed; this may damage the that you entrust corresponding procedures to windshield.◀ the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. Replacing the wiper blades You can obtain a selection of replacement 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer bulbs at the service center. to page 68, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
198 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 199
Replacing components Mobility
Danger of burns Headlamp glass Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ otherwise, there is the danger of getting ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When burned.◀ driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ Working on the lighting system lamp glasses do not need to be changed. When working on the lighting system, If the headlamps do not dim despite driving you should always switch off the lights af‐ with the light switched on, increasing humidity fected to prevent short circuits. forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the To avoid possible injury or equipment damage service center check this. when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Headlamp setting The headlamp adjustments can be affected by Do not perform work/bulb replacement changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a on xenon headlamps change, have the headlamp setting checked Have any work on the xenon lighting system, and corrected by Service. including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage Front lamps, bulb replacement present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Halogen headlamps Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 1 Parking lamps Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover 2 High beams/headlamp flasher serve as the light source for controls, display elements and other equipment. 3 Low beams These light-emitting diodes, which are related 4 Turn signal to conventional lasers, are officially designated 5 Daytime running lights as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
199 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 200
Mobility Replacing components
Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams Follow the general instructions on lamps and 55-watt bulb, H7. bulbs, refer to page 198. 1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐ 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ move. ets and remove the cover.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove. Turn signal 21-watt bulb, PY21W 1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb. 4. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 5. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn place. counterclockwise and remove. 3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal. 4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages. 7. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 201
Replacing components Mobility
Accessing the daytime running lights, high High beams/headlamp flasher beams/headlamp flasher and parking 55-watt bulb, H7. lamps 1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it Follow the general instructions on lamps and from the holder and remove. bulbs, refer to page 198. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 191. 2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐ move.
2. Pull the connector off the bulb. 3. Attach the connector to the new bulb. 4. First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into Parking lamps place. 6-watt bulb, H6W. 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.
5. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages.
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place. 4. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Make sure that the cap engages.
201 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 202
Mobility Replacing components
Daytime running lights Headlamps 24-watt bulb, PW24W. 1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb connector. 2. Remove the bulb holder.
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with 3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. xenon technology. 4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse The parking lamps and daylight running lights order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ are made using LED technology. tom of the bulb holder must be facing Contact your service center in the event of a downward. Make sure that the bulb holder malfunction. snaps into place. 5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal 6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Follow the general instructions on lamps and Make sure that the cap engages. bulbs, refer to page 198.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.
202 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 203
Replacing components Mobility
21-watt bulb, PY21W Headlamps 1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover.
1 Daytime running lights 2 Low beams/headlamp flasher 2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the 3 High beams wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb 4 Parking lamps / daytime running lights holder counterclockwise and remove. 5 Turn signal 6 Side marker lights
Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. 35-watt bulb, H8. 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1. verse order of removal. Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐ 5. Attach the cover to the wheel house. row 2.
LED headlamps
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side indicators are designed with LED technology. If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply 2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. with local regulations. Turn the bulb, arrow 2. Contact your service center in the event of a Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. malfunction.
203 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 204
Mobility Replacing components
Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps wise. Remove the bulb. General information Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W. Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL. The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐ tact your service center in the event of a mal‐ function. Use caution when replacing the bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector Use caution and proceed one step at a and screw on the wheel house panel. time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀ Turn signal in exterior mirror Follow the general instructions on lamps and Removing the exterior tail lamp bulbs, refer to page 198. 1. Open trunk lid. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature 2. Loosen and remove the mounting pin of LED technology. Contact your service center the cover, arrow 1, with the screwdriver in the event of a malfunction. from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
3. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit to press in the latch, arrow 2, and remove the cover, arrow 3.
1 Turn signal 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lamps 5 Outside brake lamp
204 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 205
Replacing components Mobility
4. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver, 2. Press the defective bulb gently into the arrows. socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ teners.
Installing the tail lamp 1. Connect the connecting line to the tail lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip. 2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing 5. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐ ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is row 1, and carefully pull it backward and not damaged. out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it 3. Position and firmly press the outer part of in place in order to prevent the tail lamp the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐ from coming loose suddenly. Make sure row 1 and the inner part onto the centering that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the component, arrow 2. Make sure that the centering pin. tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐ 4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts. nector of the connecting line and remove 5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the the connector from the bulb holder. fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is not pinched. Replacing the bulbs 1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on Lamps in the trunk lid the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, arrow 2. General information Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 198. Reversing lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W. Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W
205 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 206
Mobility Replacing components
Accessing the lamps Installing the bulb holder 1. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐ 1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐ pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐ move the four screws on the trim. row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.
2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid, 2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that starting at the edge and working toward the two exterior fasteners latch into place. the area around the recessed grips. Make 3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and sure that the trim does not become stuck. secure. 3. Carefully swing out the trim. Tail lamp, license plate lamp and Replacing the reversing lamp and inner central brake lamp brake lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and 1. Loosen the bottom fastener and hold the bulbs, refer to page 198. lamp holder on the guide rail, arrow 1. These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Changing wheels
Hints The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire. 2. Loosen the top fastener, arrow 2, and re‐ When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire move the lamp holder, arrow 3. does not need to be changed immediately in 3. Press the defective bulb gently into the the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. The tools for changing wheels are available as 4. Insert the new bulb. accessories from your service center.
206 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 207
Replacing components Mobility
Jacking points for the vehicle jack Charging the battery
Note Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.◀
General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery cated at the positions shown. remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: Vehicle battery ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. Maintenance ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐ riods, longer than a month. trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you Starting aid terminals on questions regarding the battery. In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 212, in the Battery replacement engine compartment with the engine off. Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been Power failure approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; After a temporary power loss, some equipment otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and needs to be reinitialized. systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: ble.◀ ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ After a battery replacement, have the battery tions again. registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐ ▷ Time: update. ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully ▷ Date: update. available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort functions are no longer ▷ Radio station: saving new, see user's displayed. manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication. ▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 208
Mobility Replacing components
Maintain the battery in an upright position for 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3. transport and storage. Secure the battery so 4. Press the four fasteners and remove the that it does not tip over during transport. cover.
Fuses
Notes Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ Attaching the covers sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ 1. When attaching the cover, make sure that Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse all four fasteners are engaged. types and locations are stored in the fuse box 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and in the cargo area. then thread it between the bars. In the engine compartment 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws.
In the cargo area 2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
Raise the cargo floor panel.
208 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 209
Replacing components Mobility
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 210
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment Hints All standard, country-specific and optional Emergency Request not guaranteed equipment that is offered in the model series is For technical reasons, the Emergency described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ ment is also described that is not available in a able conditions.◀ vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies Initiating an Emergency Request for safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.
The button is located in the center console. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ Intelligent Emergency lished. Request ▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ Requirements lished. ▷ The radio ready state is switched on. When the emergency request is received ▷ The Assist system is functional. at the BMW Response Center, the BMW ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has Response Center contacts you and takes been activated. further steps to help you. ▷ A ConnectedDrive contract is available. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further General information steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances. Only press the SOS button in an emergency. For this purpose, data that are used to de‐ termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle
210 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 211
Breakdown assistance Mobility
if it can be established, are transmitted to Storage the BMW Response Center. ▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐ sponse Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ The first aid kit is located in the cargo area in a ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ storage compartment. fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Roadside Assistance Warning triangle Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐ sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ down.
Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be established di‐ The warning triangle is located on the inside of rectly. the trunk lid. To remove, loosen the bracket. Jump-starting First aid kit Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be Note started using the battery of another vehicle Some of the articles have a limited service life. and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items To prevent personal injury or damage to both promptly. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀
211 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 212
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ mation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles. Bodywork contact between vehicles The body ground or a special nut acts as the Make sure that there is no contact be‐ battery negative terminal. tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ Connecting the cables 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid Starting aid terminals terminal. Connecting order 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive Connect the jumper cables in the correct jumper cable to the positive terminal of the order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury battery, or to the corresponding starting from sparking.◀ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ negative terminal of the battery, or to the gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ corresponding engine or body ground of tive terminal. the vehicle to be started. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success‐ ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
212 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 213
Breakdown assistance Mobility
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ Towing charged battery to recharge. When the parking brake is blocked 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. The parking brake cannot be released 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ manually. verse order. Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake Check the battery and recharge if necessary. blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged. Contact your service center.◀
Tow-starting and towing Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, Automatic transmission: transporting vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ your vehicle ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; Note otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐ Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. available. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown. ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. Do not have the vehicle towed ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ power assist. Consequently, more force ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ needs to be applied when braking and cur.◀ steering. ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ Tow truck quired. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle response.
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only. Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.
213 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 214
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Do not lift the vehicle Attaching the tow rope correctly Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐ body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is may result.◀ secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting Towing other vehicles
General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle re‐ sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the cause damage.◀ front or rear of the BMW. It is in the onboard vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart‐ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ ment on the right side in the cargo area. Open pending on local regulations. the cover. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing Tow fitting, information on use a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with dow. the vehicle and screw it all the way in. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved Tow bar roads only. The tow fittings used should be on the same ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., side on both vehicles. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe vehicle can occur.◀ the following: ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cornering. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
214 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 215
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐ edied.
Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 211. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐ alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐ gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations. 2. Ignition, refer to page 61, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ ately press on the clutch pedal again. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked.
215 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 216
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle equipment Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is Automatic car washes described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a Hints vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Note the following: equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Car washes ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. Hints ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they Steam jets or high-pressure washers may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to and use a maximum temperature of page 67, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ 140 ℉/60 ℃. vation. If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ be triggered by the interior motion sensor tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ sively high pressures or temperatures can tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, cause damage or preliminary damage that may refer to page 43. then lead to long-term damage. Guide rails in car washes Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure Avoid car washes with guide rails higher washer.◀ than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀ Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers Before driving into a car wash When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a Park Distance Control, for extended periods of car wash, take the following steps: time and only from a distance of at least Manual transmission: 12 in/30 cm.◀ 1. Drive into the car wash. Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves 2. Shift to neutral. in the area below the windshield when the 3. Switch the engine off. hood is raised. 4. Switch on the ignition. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter.
216 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 217
Care Mobility
Automatic transmission: can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. 1. Drive into the car wash. Completely remove all residues on the win‐ 2. Engage transmission position N. dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to 3. Switch the engine off. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and In this way, the ignition remains switched wiper blade wear. on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played. Do not turn off the ignition in the car Vehicle care wash Car care products Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; BMW recommends using cleaning and care otherwise, the transmission position P is products from BMW, since these have been engaged and damages can result.◀ tested and approved. To start the engine: Car care and cleaning products 1. Depress the brake pedal. Follow the instructions on the container. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ windows. ping on the brake turns the ignition off. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside cles. when in transmission position N. A signal is Cleansers can contain substances that are sounded when an attempt is made to lock the dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ vehicle. Vehicle paint Transmission position Regular care contributes to driving safety and Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ value retention. Environmental influences in cally: areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ ▷ When the ignition is switched off. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these Headlamps influences. ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, caustic cleansers. oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed ▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due immediately to prevent the finish from being to insects, with shampoo and wash off with altered or discolored. water. Leather care ▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper. Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. After washing the vehicle Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.
217 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 218
Mobility Care
To guard against discoloration, such as from ularly when they have been exposed to road clothing, provide leather care roughly every salt. two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Rubber components cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Aside from water, treat only with rubber more visible. cleansers. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any grease will gradually break down the protective silicon-containing car care products in order to layer of the leather surface. avoid damage or reduced noise damping. Suitable care products are available from the service center. Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ Upholstery material care nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. soft cloth. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use Plastic components a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐ ble interior cleaner. These include: Clean the upholstery down to the seams using ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ▷ Headliner. material vigorously. ▷ Lamp lenses. Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Matte black spray-coated components. other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Painted parts in the interior. covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ Clean with a microfiber cloth. Lightly dampen the cloth with water. Caring for special components Do not soak the headliner. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol Light-alloy wheels or solvents When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ to surface damage.◀ turer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents Safety belts can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Chrome surfaces Chemical cleaning Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Do not clean chemically; this can destroy tor grille or door handles with an ample supply the webbing.◀ of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
218 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 219
Care Mobility
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do belts clipped into their buckles. not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage Do not allow the reels to retract the safety can result.◀ belts until they are dry. Long-term vehicle storage Carpets and floor mats Your service center can advise you on what to No objects in the area around the pedals consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months. Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, for example.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐ ger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber cloth. Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ ces or electrical components.
219 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 222
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems. described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height: 54.2 inches/1,377 mm 3 Vehicle width with exterior mirrors: 79.4 in‐ with xDrive: 54.8 inches/1,392 mm ches/2,017 mm 2 Vehicle width without exterior mirrors: 71.8 inches/1,825 mm
222 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 223
Technical data Reference
Length, wheel base
1 Wheelbase: 110.6 inches/2,810 mm 2 Vehicle length: 182.6 inches/4,638 mm
Smallest turning circle Dia.: 37.1 ft/11.3 m Dia. with xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m
Weights The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto‐ cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ matic transmission.
428i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,340/4,385 kg 1,969/1,989
Load lbs/kg 840/381
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,025/919
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,435/1,104
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445
223 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 224
Reference Technical data
435i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,475/4,505 kg 2,030/2,043
Load lbs/kg 840/381
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,135/968
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,470/1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445
428i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,540 kg 2,059
Load lbs/kg 840/381
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,160/980
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,455/1,114
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445
435i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,630/4,650 kg 2,100/2,109
Load lbs/kg 840/381
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,270/1,030
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,470/1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.7/445
224 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 225
Technical data Reference
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to page 180
Windshield and headlamp 0.8/3 washer system
225 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 226
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index A All around the center con‐ Automatic recirculated-air sole 14 control 146 ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All around the headliner 15 Automatic transmission with tem 115 All around the steering Steptronic 69 ACC, Active Cruise Control wheel 12 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ with Stop & Go 120 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ mate control 145 Acceleration Assistant, refer ter tires 187 AUTO program, climate con‐ to Launch Control 71 All-wheel-drive 116 trol 143 Activated-charcoal filter 147 Alternating-code hand-held AUTO program, intensity 145 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ transmitter 150 Auto Start/Stop function 63 tion 111 Alternative oil types 193 Average fuel consumption 85 Active Cruise Control with Antifreeze, washer fluid 68 Average speed 85 Stop & Go, ACC 120 Antilock Brake System, Axle loads, weights 223 Active Protection 112 ABS 115 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Anti-slip control, refer to B Brake force display 112 DSC 115 Adaptive Light Control 90 Approved engine oils 193 Backrest curvature, refer to Additives, oil 193 Arrival time 85 Lumbar support 49 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Ash tray 153 Backrest, width 49 straints 47 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Backup camera 131 After washing vehicle 217 tance 211 Band-aids, refer to First aid Airbags 94 Assistance when driving kit 211 Airbags, indicator/warning off 119 Bar for tow-starting/ light 95 Assist system information, on towing 214 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Control Display 88 Battery replacement, vehicle culated-air mode 143, 146 Attentiveness assistant 113 battery 207 Air, dehumidifying, refer to AUTO intensity 145 Battery replacement, vehicle Cooling function 143 Automatic car wash 216 remote control 32 Air distribution, Automatic climate con‐ Battery, vehicle 207 manual 143, 146 trol 142 Belt carrier 52 Air drying, refer to Cooling Automatic climate control Belts, safety belts 51 function 145 with enhanced features 144 Beverage holder, cu‐ Air flow, air conditioner 143 Automatic Cruise Control pholder 159 Air flow, automatic climate with Stop & Go 120 Blinds, sun protection 44 control 146 Automatic Curb Monitor 55 BMW Assist, see user's Air pressure, tires 181 Automatic deactivation, front manual for Navigation, En‐ Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ passenger airbags 96 tertainment and Communi‐ tion 147 Automatic headlamp con‐ cation Alarm system 42 trol 90 BMW Homepage 6 Alarm, unintentional 43 Automatic locking 41 BMW Internet page 6
226 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 227
Everything from A to Z Reference
BMW maintenance sys‐ Care, displays 219 Child seat, mounting 57 tem 196 Care, vehicle 217 Child seats 57 Bonus range, ECO PRO 172 Cargo 167 Chrome parts, care 218 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Cargo area, enlarging 155 Cigarette lighter 153 pholder 159 Cargo area lid 38 Cleaning, displays 219 Brake assistant 115 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Climate control 142, 144 Brake discs, breaking in 164 ments 160 Clock 79 Brake force display 112 Cargo, securing 168 Closing/opening from in‐ Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ Cargo straps, securing side 38 play 112 cargo 168 Closing/opening via door Brake lights, adaptive 112 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ lock 37 Brake pads, breaking in 164 trol 32 Closing/opening with remote Braking, hints 165 Carpet, care 219 control 36 Breakdown assis‐ Car wash 216 Clothes hooks 160 tance 210, 211 Catalytic converter, refer to Coasting 174 Breaking in 164 Hot exhaust system 165 Coasting with engine decou‐ Brightness of Control Dis‐ CBS Condition Based Serv‐ pled, coasting 174 play 87 ice 196 Coasting with idling en‐ Bulb replacement 198 CD/Multimedia, see user's gine 174 Bulb replacement, front 199 manual for Navigation, En‐ Cockpit 12 Bulb replacement, halogen tertainment and Communi‐ Collision warning with City headlamps 199 cation Braking function 103 Bulb replacement, LED head‐ Center armrest 158 Combination switch, refer to lamps 203 Center console 14 Turn signals 66 Bulb replacement, rear 204 Center-Lock, see button for Combination switch, refer to Bulb replacement, xenon central locking 35 Wiper system 66 headlamps 202 Central locking system 35 Comfort Access 39 Bulbs and lamps 198 Central screen, refer to Con‐ COMFORT program, Dy‐ Button, RES 123 trol Display 16 namic Driving Control 118 Button, Start/Stop 61 Changes, technical, refer to Compartments in the Bypassing, refer to Jump- Safety 7 doors 158 starting 211 Changing parts 198 Compass 151 Changing wheels 206 Computer 84 C Changing wheels/tires 187 Condensation on win‐ Check Control 76 dows 146 California Proposition 65 Checking the oil level elec‐ Condensation under the vehi‐ Warning 7 tronically 192 cle 166 Camera, care 219 Children, seating position 57 Condition Based Service Camera, rearview cam‐ Children, transporting CBS 196 era 131 safely 57 Configure driving mode 118 Camera, Side View 134 Child restraint fixing sys‐ Confirmation signal 41 Camera, Top View 135 tem 57 ConnectedDrive, see user's Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Child restraint fixing system manual for Navigation, En‐ pholder 159 LATCH 58 tertainment and Communi‐ Car battery 207 Child restraint fixing systems, cation Car care products 217 mounting 57 ConnectedDrive Services
227 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 228
Reference Everything from A to Z
Connecting electrical devi‐ Display in windshield 140 ECO PRO display 171 ces 153 Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO driving mode 171 Control Display 16 strument lighting 92 ECO PRO mode 171 Control Display, settings 86 Displays 73 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ Controller 16, 17 Displays, cleaning 219 struction 173 Control systems, driving sta‐ Disposal, coolant 195 EfficientDynamics 173 bility 115 Disposal, vehicle battery 207 Electronic displays, instru‐ Convenient opening 36 Distance control, refer to ment cluster 75 Coolant 195 PDC 128 Electronic Stability Program Coolant temperature 79 Distance to destination 85 ESP, refer to DSC 115 Cooling function 143, 145 Divided screen view, split Emergency detection, remote Cooling, maximum 145 screen 21 control 33 Cooling system 195 Door lock, refer to Remote Emergency release, door Corrosion on brake discs 166 control 32 lock 37 Cruise control 126 Drive-off assistant 119 Emergency release, fuel filler Cruise control, active with Drive-off assistant, refer to flap 178 Stop & Go 120 DSC 115 Emergency Request 210 Cruising range 79 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ Emergency service, refer to Cupholder 159 gent Safety 102 Roadside Assistance 211 Current fuel consumption 80 Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Emergency start function, en‐ gent Safety 102 gine start 33 D Driving experience Emergency unlocking, trunk switch 117 lid 39 Damage, tires 186 Driving instructions, breaking Energy Control 80 Damping control, dy‐ in 164 Energy recovery 80 namic 116 Driving mode 117 Engine, automatic Start/Stop Data, technical 222 Driving notes, general 164 function 63 Date 79 Driving stability control sys‐ Engine, automatic switch- Daytime running lights 90 tems 115 off 63 Defrosting, refer to defrosting Driving tips 164 Engine compartment 190 the windows 143 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine compartment, work‐ Defrosting, refer to Windows, trol 115 ing in 191 defrosting 146 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine coolant 195 Defrosting the windows 143 trol 116 Engine idling when driving, Dehumidifying, air 143 Dynamic Damping Con‐ coasting 174 Destination distance 85 trol 116 Engine oil 192 Digital clock 79 Dynamic Stability Control Engine oil, adding 193 Digital compass 151 DSC 115 Engine oil additives 193 Dimensions 222 Dynamic Traction Control Engine oil change 193 Dimmable exterior mirrors 55 DTC 116 Engine oil filler neck 193 Dimmable interior rearview Engine oil temperature 78 mirror 55 E Engine oil types, alterna‐ Direction indicator, refer to tive 193 Turn signals 66 ECO PRO 171 Engine oil types, ap‐ Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO Analyser 175 proved 193 ment cluster 75 ECO PRO, bonus range 172
228 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 229
Everything from A to Z Reference
Engine start during malfunc‐ Flooding 165 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ tion 33 Floor carpet, care 219 proved 223 Engine start, jump-start‐ Floor mats, care 219 Gross weight, permissible for ing 211 Fogged up windows 143 trailer towing 223 Engine start, refer to Starting Fold down the rear seat back‐ the engine 62 rest, see Though-loading H Engine stop 62 system 155 Engine temperature 78 Fold-out position, windshield Handbrake, refer to parking Entering a car wash 216 wipers 68 brake 65 Equipment, interior 149 Foot brake 165 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Front airbags 94 nating code 150 gram, refer to DSC 115 Front fog lamps 92 Hazard warning flashers 210 Exchanging wheels/tires 187 Front fog lamps, front, bulb Head airbags 94 Exhaust system 165 replacement 203 Headlamp control, auto‐ Exterior mirror, automatic Front lamps 199 matic 90 dimming feature 55 Front passenger airbags, au‐ Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ Exterior mirrors 54 tomatic deactivation 96 ture 89 External start 211 Front passenger airbags, indi‐ Headlamp flasher 66 External temperature dis‐ cator lamp 96 Headlamp glass 199 play 79 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 100 Headlamps 199 External temperature warn‐ Fuel 180 Headlamps, care 217 ing 79 Fuel cap 178 Headlamp washer system 66 Eyes for securing cargo 168 Fuel consumption, current 80 Headliner 15 Fuel consumption, refer to Head restraints 47 F Average fuel consump‐ Head restraints, front 52 tion 85 Head-up Display 140 Failure message, refer to Fuel filler flap 178 Head-up Display, care 219 Check Control 76 Fuel gauge 78 Heavy cargo, stowing 168 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel quality 180 Height, vehicle 222 tional alarm 43 Fuel recommendation 180 High-beam Assistant 91 Fan, refer to Air Fuel, tank capacity 225 High beams 66 flow 143, 146 Fuse 208 High beams/low beams, refer Fault displays, refer to Check to High-beam Assistant 91 Control 76 G Hills 166 Filler neck for engine oil 193 Hill start assistant, refer to Fine wood, care 218 Garage door opener, refer to Drive-off assistant 119 First aid kit 211 Integrated universal remote Hints 6 Fitting for towing, refer to control 149 Holder for beverages 159 Tow fitting 214 Gasoline 180 Homepage 6 Flat tire, changing Gasoline quality 180 Hood 191 wheels 206 Gear change, automatic Horn 12 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100 transmission 70 Hotel function, trunk lid 39 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gear shift indicator 81 Hot exhaust system 165 tor TPM 97 General driving notes 164 HUD Head-up Display 140 Flat tire, warning Glass sunroof, powered 45 Hydroplaning 165 lamp 98, 101 Glove compartment 157
229 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 230
Reference Everything from A to Z
I Interior lamps via remote con‐ Launch Control 71 trol 36 Leather, care 217 Ice warning, refer to External Interior motion sensor 43 LED light, bulb replace‐ temperature warning 79 Interior rearview mirror 55 ment 203 Icy roads, refer to External Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐ temperature warning 79 matic dimming feature 55 odes 199 Identification marks, tires 184 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ Length, vehicle 223 Identification number, refer to pass 151 Letters and numbers, enter‐ Important features in the en‐ Internet page 6 ing 22 gine compartment 190 Interval display, service re‐ Light alloy wheels, care 218 iDrive 16 quirements 80 Light control 90 Ignition key, refer to Remote Light-emitting diodes, control 32 J LEDs 199 Ignition off 61 Lighter 153 Ignition on 61 Jacking points for the vehicle Lighting 89 Indication of a flat tire 98, 101 jack 207 Lighting via remote con‐ Indicator and warning Joystick, automatic transmis‐ trol 36 lamps 76 sion 70 Light switch 89 Individual air distribu‐ Jump-starting 211 Load 167 tion 143, 146 Loading 167 Individual settings, refer to K Lock, door 37 Personal Profile 33 Locking/unlocking from in‐ Inflation pressure, tires 181 Key/remote control 32 side 38 Inflation pressure warning Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Locking/unlocking via door FTM, tires 100 Access 39 lock 37 Info display, refer to Com‐ Key Memory, refer to Per‐ Locking/unlocking with re‐ puter 84 sonal Profile 33 mote control 36 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Kickdown, automatic trans‐ Locking, automatic 41 tor TPM 98 mission 70 Locking, central 35 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Knee airbag 94 Locking, settings 41 FTM 101 Low beams 89 Instrument cluster 73 L Low beams, automatic, refer Instrument cluster, electronic to High-beam Assistant 91 displays 75 Lamp replacement 198 Lower back support 49 Instrument lighting 92 Lamp replacement, front 199 Luggage rack, refer to Roof- Integrated key 32 Lamp replacement, rear 204 mounted luggage rack 168 Integrated universal remote Lamps 89 Lumbar support 49 control 149 Lamps and bulbs 198 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lane departure warning 109 M quest 210 Lane margin, warning 109 Intelligent Safety 102 Language on Control Dis‐ Maintenance 196 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ play 87 Maintenance require‐ gram 145 Lashing eyes, securing ments 196 Interior equipment 149 cargo 168 Maintenance, service require‐ Interior lamps 92 LATCH child restraint fixing ments 80 system 58
230 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 231
Everything from A to Z Reference
Maintenance system, Mirror 54 Oil change interval, service BMW 196 Mirror memory 53 requirements 80 Malfunction displays, refer to Mobile communication devi‐ Oil filler neck 193 Check Control 76 ces in the vehicle 165 Oil types, alternative 193 Manual air distribu‐ Modifications, technical, refer Oil types, approved 193 tion 143, 146 to Safety 7 Old batteries, disposal 207 Manual air flow 143, 146 Moisture in headlamp 199 Onboard monitor, refer to Manual mode, transmis‐ Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Control Display 16 sion 70 play 16 Onboard vehicle tool kit 198 Manual operation, door Mounting of child restraint fix‐ Opening and closing 32 lock 37 ing systems 57 Opening and closing, from in‐ Manual operation, exterior Multifunction steering wheel, side 38 mirrors 55 buttons 12 Opening and closing via door Manual operation, fuel filler lock 37 flap 178 N Opening and closing, with re‐ Manual operation, Park Dis‐ mote control 36 tance Control PDC 129 Navigation, see user's manual Opening the trunk lid with no- Manual operation, rearview for Navigation, Entertain‐ touch activation 40 camera 132 ment and Communication Operating concept, iDrive 16 Manual operation, Side Neck restraints, front, refer to Optional equipment, standard View 134 Head restraints 52 equipment 6 Manual operation, Top Neutral cleaner, see wheel Outside air, refer to Auto‐ View 135 cleaner 218 matic recirculated-air con‐ Manual transmission 69 New wheels and tires 187 trol 146 Marking on approved No Passing Information 82 Overheating of engine, refer tires 187 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ to Coolant temperature 79 Marking, run-flat tires 188 towing 214 Overtaking prohibitions 82 Master key, refer to Remote control 32 O P Maximum cooling 145 Maximum speed, display 82 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 197 Paint, vehicle 217 Maximum speed, winter OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Parallel parking assistant 137 tires 188 agnosis 197 Park Distance Control Measure, units of 87 Obstacle marking, rearview PDC 128 Medical kit 211 camera 133 Parked-car ventilation 147 Memory, seat, mirror 53 Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐ Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Menu, EfficientDynamics 173 line quality 180 tion 166 Menu in instrument clus‐ Odometer 79 Parking aid, refer to PDC 128 ter 84 Office, see user's manual for Parking assistant 137 Menus, operating, iDrive 16 Navigation, Entertainment Parking brake 65 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ and Communication Parking lamps 89 ing concept 18 Oil 192 Passenger side mirror, tilting Messages, refer to Check Oil, adding 193 downward 55 Control 76 Oil additives 193 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Microfilter 144, 147 Oil change 193 era 132 Minimum tread, tires 186
231 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 232
Reference Everything from A to Z
PDC Park Distance Con‐ Recirculated-air Safety belts, care 218 trol 128 mode 143, 146 Safety Package, refer to Ac‐ Pedestrian warning with city Recommended tire tive Protection 112 braking function 107 brands 187 Safety systems, airbags 94 Permissible axle load 223 Refueling 178 Saving fuel 170 Personal Profile 33 Remaining range 79 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ Pinch protection system, Remote control/key 32 play 16 glass sunroof 45 Remote control, malfunc‐ Screwdriver 198 Pinch protection system, win‐ tion 36 Screw thread for tow fit‐ dows 44 Remote control, univer‐ ting 215 Plastic, care 218 sal 149 Seat and mirror memory 53 Power failure 207 Replacement fuse 208 Seat belts, refer to Safety Power sunroof, glass 45 Replacing parts 198 belts 51 Power windows 43 Replacing wheels/tires 187 Seat heating, front 50 Pressure, tire air pres‐ Reporting safety defects 9 Seating position for chil‐ sure 181 RES button 123 dren 57 Pressure warning FTM, Reserve warning, refer to Seats 47 tires 100 Range 79 Selection list in instrument Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor cluster 84 file 33 TPM 98 Selector lever, automatic Programmable memory but‐ Retaining straps, securing transmission 70 tons, iDrive 22 cargo 168 Sensors, care 219 Protective function, glass Retreaded tires 187 Service and warranty 7 sunroof 45 Roadside parking lamps 90 Service history 81 Protective function, win‐ Roller sunblinds 44 Service requirements, Condi‐ dows 44 RON gasoline quality 180 tion Based Service Push-and-turn switch, refer to Roof load capacity 223 CBS 196 Controller 16, 17 Roof-mounted luggage Service requirements, dis‐ rack 168 play 80 R Rope for tow-starting/ Service, Roadside Assis‐ towing 214 tance 211 Radiator fluid 195 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Services, ConnectedDrive Radio-operated key, refer to ponent, refer to Run-flat Settings, locking/unlock‐ Remote control 32 tires 188 ing 41 Radio ready state 62 Rubber components, Settings on Control Dis‐ Radio, see user's manual for care 218 play 86 Navigation, Entertainment Run-flat tires 188 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ and Communication ror 53 Rain sensor 67 S Shifting, automatic transmis‐ Rear lamps 204 sion 69 Rear socket 154 Safe braking 165 Shifting, manual transmis‐ Rearview mirror 54 Safety 7 sion 69 Rear window de‐ Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Shift paddles on steering froster 143, 146 er's seat and front passen‐ wheel 71 Recirculated-air filter 147 ger seat 51 Side airbags 94 Safety belts 51 Side View 133
232 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 233
Everything from A to Z Reference
Signaling, horn 12 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ Theft protection, refer to Signals when unlocking 41 mission 69 Central locking system 35 Sitting safely 47 Stopping the engine 62 Thigh support 49 Size 222 Storage compartments 157 Through-loading system 155 Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Storage compartments, loca‐ Tilt alarm sensor 43 Smallest turning circle 223 tions 157 Time of arrival 85 Snow chains 188 Storage, tires 188 Tire damage 186 Socket 153 Storing the vehicle 219 Tire identification marks 184 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Summer tires, tread 186 Tire inflation pressure 181 nostics 197 Supplementary text mes‐ Tire inflation pressure moni‐ SOS button 210 sage 77 tor, refer to FTM 100 Spare fuse 208 Surround View 131 Tire Pressure Monitor Specified engine oil Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ TPM 97 types 193 ing 117 Tires, changing 187 Speed, average 85 Switch-on times, parked-car Tires, everything on wheels Speed limit detection, on‐ ventilation 148 and tires 181 board computer 85 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Tires, run-flat tires 188 Speed limiter, display 82 Symbols 6 Tire tread 186 Speed Limit Information 82 Tone, see user's manual for Speed limit in the com‐ T Navigation, Entertainment puter 85 and Communication Split screen 21 Tachometer 78 Tools 198 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Tailgate 38 Top View 135 Driving Control 117 Tailgate opening with no- Total vehicle weight 223 Sport automatic transmis‐ touch activation 40 Touchpad 19 sion 71 Tailgate via remote con‐ Tow fitting 214 Sport displays, torque dis‐ trol 36 Towing 213 play, performance dis‐ Tail lamps 204 Tow-starting 213 play 86 Technical changes, refer to Tow truck 213 SPORT program, Dynamic Safety 7 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Driving Control 117 Technical data 222 tor 97 Sport program, transmis‐ Telephone, see user's manual Traction control 116 sion 70 for Navigation, Entertain‐ TRACTION program, Dy‐ Sport steering, variable 117 ment and Communication namic Driving Control 116 Stability control systems 115 Temperature, automatic cli‐ Transmission, automatic 69 Start/stop, automatic func‐ mate control 143, 145 Transmission, manual 69 tion 63 Temperature display, external Transporting children Start/Stop button 61 temperature 79 safely 57 Start function during malfunc‐ Temperature, engine oil 78 Tread, tires 186 tion 33 Tempomat, refer to Active Trip computer 86 Starting the engine 62 Cruise Control 120 Triple turn signal activa‐ Status display, tires 97 Terminal, starting aid 212 tion 66 Status information, iDrive 20 Text message, supplemen‐ Trip odometer 79 Status of Owner's Manual 6 tary 77 Truck for tow-starting/ Steering wheel, adjusting 56 Theft alarm system, refer to towing 213 Steering wheel heating 56 Alarm system 42 Trunk lid 38
233 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13 Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle jack 207 Windshield wipers, fold-out ing 39 Vehicle paint 217 position 68 Trunk lid, hotel function 39 Vehicle storage 219 Winter storage, care 219 Trunk lid opening with no- Vehicle wash 216 Winter tires, suitable touch activation 40 Ventilation 147 tires 187 Trunk lid via remote con‐ Ventilation, refer to Parked- Winter tires, tread 186 trol 36 car ventilation 147 Wiper blades, replacing 198 Turning circle 223 Voice activation system 24 Wiper fluid 68 Turning circle lines, rearview Wiper system 66 camera 132 W Wood, care 218 Turn signals, operation 66 Word match concept, naviga‐ Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ Warning indicators 76 tion 23 placement 204 Warning lamps 76 Wrench 198 Warning messages, refer to U Check Control 76 X Warning triangle 211 Unintentional alarm 43 Washer fluid 68 xDrive 116 Units of measure 87 Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐ Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐ Universal remote control 149 pacity 225 placement 202 Unlock button, automatic Washer nozzles, wind‐ transmission 70 shield 68 Unlocking/locking from in‐ Washer system 66 side 38 Washing, vehicle 216 Unlocking/locking via door Water on roads 165 lock 37 Weights 223 Unlocking/locking with re‐ Welcome lamps 89 mote control 36 Wheel base, vehicle 223 Unlocking, settings 41 Wheel cleaner 218 Updates made after the edito‐ Wheels, changing 187 rial deadline 7 Wheels, everything on wheels Upholstery care 218 and tires 181 USB interface 154 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100 V Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 97 Variable sport steering 117 Width, vehicle 222 Vehicle battery 207 Window defroster, Vehicle battery, replac‐ rear 143, 146 ing 207 Windows, powered 43 Vehicle, breaking in 164 Windshield washer fluid 68 Vehicle care 217 Windshield washer noz‐ Vehicle equipment 6 zles 68 Vehicle identification number, Windshield washer sys‐ refer to Identification num‐ tem 66 ber in the engine compart‐ Windshield wiper 66 ment 190
234 Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving bmwusa.com Machine 0140 2 909 827 ue 0140 2 909 827
*BL290982700H*
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 909 827 - VI/13